M7 Series Modular

Satellite Modem

M7/M7L/M7LT/M7D/M7DL Series

Installation and Operation Manual

Revision 0.05.0

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

This page is intentionally blank.
M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Preface

Table of Contents
1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1. M7 Modem Description ......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2. Network Types ...................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3. What’s New – This Modem and This Manual ....................................................................... 1-8
1.4. M7 Modem Assemblies ....................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5. M7 Capabilities .................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.6. Forward Error Correction (FEC) Options ............................................................................ 1-22
1.7. M7 Series Feature Sets ...................................................................................................... 1-26
1.8. 1:1 Redundancy Function (Future Option) .......................................................................... 1-26
2.0 Installation Requirements ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1. Unpacking ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2. Mounting Considerations ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3. Modem Connections ............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4. Adding or Changing the Interface Type .............................................................................. 2-21
2.5. Option Turbo Product Codes FEC Option Installation ........................................................ 2-21
2.6. Redundancy Connection (Future Option) ........................................................................... 2-23
3.0 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1. Operating Procedures ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2. Front Panel ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3. Front Panel Control and Monitor Matrix ................................................................................ 3-3
3.4. Web Browser Operation ........................................................................................................ 3-6
3.5. Front Panel Monitor and Control Parameters ..................................................................... 3-32
3.6. Remote Command Interface Control .................................................................................. 3-78
3.7. Modem Configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-78
3.8. Data Interface Options - Technical Details ......................................................................... 3-85
3.9. Data Interface Clock Options .............................................................................................. 3-96
3.10. Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Operation ..................................................... 3-101
3.11. Special Control Mechanisms ......................................................................................... 3-109
3.12. Storing and Recalling Configuration .............................................................................. 3-110
3.13. Burst Mode Operation ................................................................................................... 3-110
3.14. Built-in 1:1 Redundancy Mode Operation (Future Option) ............................................ 3-111
4.0 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1. Periodic Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. Modem Checkout .................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. Internal Modem Test Functions............................................................................................. 4-3
4.4. Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.5. Updating Modem Firmware ................................................................................................... 4-8
4.6. Upgrading the Modem Feature Set ..................................................................................... 4-12
4.7. Frequently Asked Questions - FAQ .................................................................................... 4-14

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

Preface M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figures
Figure 1-1 – M7 Series Modems ......................................................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-2 – Point-to-Point Network .................................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 1-3 – Four (4) Site Point-to-Multipoint Network ....................................................................... 1-7
Figure 1-4 – Four (4) Site Mesh Network ............................................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-5 – M7 Modem (shown in 1RU shelf configuration) ............................................................. 1-8
Figure 1-6 – M7LT Terminal (showing front and rear views) .............................................................. 1-9
Figure 1-7 – M7 Modem Assemblies (shown with standard serial interface) ................................... 1-10
Figure 1-8 - Modem Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 1-11
Figure 1-9 – Spectrum Analyzer Plot of 0.35 verses 0.08 Roll-off factors ........................................ 1-12
Figure 1-10 – Carrier Alpha = 0.08, 1Msps x1.10 Carrier Spacing ................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-11 - Synchronous Serial Interface ...................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-12 - Ethernet Interface (I7) ................................................................................................. 1-15
Figure 1-13 – Express Ethernet Interface (E7) ................................................................................. 1-16
Figure 1-14 - Dual G.703/E1 Interface (G7)...................................................................................... 1-17
Figure 1-15 - HSSI Interface ............................................................................................................. 1-18
Figure 1-16 - Dual Interface Configuration I7 and S7 ....................................................................... 1-18
Figure 1-17 - Dual Interface Configuration I7 and G7 ....................................................................... 1-19
Figure 1-18 - Dual Interface Configuration E7 and G7 ..................................................................... 1-19
Figure 1-19 - Reed-Solomon Block Diagram .................................................................................... 1-24
Figure 1-20 - TCP Option Card ......................................................................................................... 1-25
Figure 2-1 – M7 Rear Panel with Synchronous Serial Interface Option ............................................. 2-2
Figure 2-2 – M7LT Rear Panel with AC Prime Power Input ............................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-3 – M7LT Rear Panel with DC Prime Power Input ............................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-4 – M7LT Rear Panel Connector Options (N Type or F Type) ............................................. 2-5
Figure 2-5 – M7LT Rear Panel indicators ........................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-6 – M7LT Internal BUC Power Supply (AC version shown) ................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-7 – M7LT Internal BUC Power Supply (DC Version) ............................................................ 2-7
Figure 2-8 – I7 - IP Interface Rear Panel .......................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-9 - Express Ethernet Interface (E7) .................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-10 - Typical SFP Interface Adapters (Optical and GbE shown) ......................................... 2-14
Figure 2-11 – G7 - Dual G.703/E1 Interface Rear Panel .................................................................. 2-15
Figure 2-12 – RJ45 to BNC adapter ................................................................................................. 2-15
Figure 2-13 – HSSI Interface Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-14 - Typical single interface card layout (Synchronous Serial Interface shown) ................ 2-21
Figure 2-15 - FEC Option Card Installation ....................................................................................... 2-22
Figure 3-1 - M7 Front Panel Controls and Indicators .......................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 – Front Panel Matrix Navigation ........................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3-3 – Login Page...................................................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-4 - M7 Web Browser Page Sections..................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-5 - Summary Status Page .................................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-6 - Unit Status Page ............................................................................................................. 3-9
Figure 3-7 - Unit Reference Page ....................................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-8 – Unit Events Log Page ................................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-9 - Unit Remote IP Control Interface Pages ....................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-10 - Unit Remote Serial Control Interface Page ................................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-11 - Unit HTTP Page .......................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-12 – Unit Event Page .......................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-13 – Modulator Status Page ............................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-14 – Modulator IF Page ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-15 – Modulator Data Interface Page................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-16 – Modulator Event Page ................................................................................................ 3-14
Figure 3-17 – Demodulator Status Page .......................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-18 – Demodulator IF Page ................................................................................................. 3-15
Figure 3-19 – Demodulator Data Interface Page .............................................................................. 3-16
Figure 3-20 – Demodulator Event Page ........................................................................................... 3-16

iv M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Preface

Figure 3-21 – Demodulator Monitor Constellation Page ................................................................... 3-17

Figure 3-22 – Demodulator Monitor Spectrum Analyzer Page ......................................................... 3-18
Figure 3-23 - Serial Synchronous Interface Status Page .................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3-24 - Serial Synchronous Interface I/O Page ....................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3-25 - Serial Synchronous Interface Overhead Mux/Demux Page ........................................ 3-20
Figure 3-26 - Serial Synchronous Interface ESC Interface Page ...................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-27 - Serial Synchronous Interface Test Configuration Page ............................................... 3-21
Figure 3-28 – Serial Synchronous Interface Event Page .................................................................. 3-22
Figure 3-29 – I7 Interface Status Page ............................................................................................. 3-23
Figure 3-30 - I7 Interface IP Configuration Page ............................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-31 – I7 Interface MCC Configuration Page ......................................................................... 3-24
Figure 3-32 – I7 Interface Event Page .............................................................................................. 3-24
Figure 3-33 - I7 Interface Statistics Page .......................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3-34 – E7 Interface Status Page ............................................................................................ 3-26
Figure 3-35 - E7 Interface Events Page ............................................................................................ 3-26
Figure 3-36 - E7 Interface I/O Port Configuration Page .................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-37 - E7 Interface QoS Configuration Page ......................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-38 - E7 Interface Statistics Page ......................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3-39 – Dual G.703 Interface Status Page .............................................................................. 3-29
Figure 3-40 – Dual G.703 Interface Send Mux Page ........................................................................ 3-29
Figure 3-41 – Dual G.703 I/O Port 1 Page (showing D&I selections) ............................................... 3-30
Figure 3-42 – Dual G.703 Interface Event Page ............................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-43 - Alarm Processing ......................................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-44 - Express Ethernet Interface Block Diagram .................................................................. 3-89
Figure 3-45 - Point-to-Point Satellite Network ................................................................................... 3-91
Figure 3-46 - Point-to-Multipoint Satellite Network ............................................................................ 3-92
Figure 3-47 – Four site PtMP Hub and one Remote site example .................................................... 3-92
Figure 3-48 – Four site Mesh network example ................................................................................ 3-93
Figure 3-49 – Configuration of a Mesh network site with a spare demodulator ................................ 3-94
Figure 3-50 – Modulator Clock Source Options ................................................................................ 3-97
Figure 3-51 – Demodulator Clock Source Options ............................................................................ 3-98
Figure 3-52 – AUPC Remote Enabled Network .............................................................................. 3-102
Figure 3-53 – Hub Modulator with optional AUPC Demodulator ..................................................... 3-104
Figure 3-54 – Point-to-Multipoint AUPC configuration for a four (4) site network ........................... 3-105
Figure 3-55 – M7 Connections for 1:1 Redundancy........................................................................ 3-111
Figure 4-1 – Loopback Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 4-3
Figure 4-2 – Unit Feature Page ......................................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 4-3 – Modulator Feature Page ............................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-4 – Demodulator Feature Page ........................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-5 – E7 Interface Feature Page ............................................................................................ 4-13

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 v

Preface M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Tables
Table 1-1 – Bandwidth Savings Related to Carrier Alpha ................................................................ 1-13
Table 1-2 – Internal Framing Options ............................................................................................... 1-20
Table 1-3 – Modulation, FEC, and Code Rates. ............................................................................... 1-22
Table 1-4 - Reed-Solomon Modes .................................................................................................... 1-24
Table 1-5 - M7 Series Feature and Option Matrix. ........................................................................... 1-26
Table 2-1 - Remote IP Control Connector Pinout (J4) ........................................................................ 2-3
Table 2-2 - Remote Control Connector Pinout (J5) ............................................................................ 2-4
Table 2-3 - Alarm Connector Pinout (J6) ............................................................................................ 2-4
Table 2-4 - Rear Panel BUC and LNB Status Indicator ...................................................................... 2-6
Table 2-5 – BUC power supply options .............................................................................................. 2-8
Table 2-6 – Synchronous Serial Data Interface Connector Pinout (J11) ............................................ 2-9
Table 2-7 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-232 (J10) ...................... 2-10
Table 2-8 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-485 (J10) ...................... 2-10
Table 2-9 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-232 (J10) ....... 2-11
Table 2-10 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-485 (J10) ..... 2-12
Table 2-11 - I7 IP Interface Connector Pinout (J12) ......................................................................... 2-13
Table 2-12 - I7 Console Connector Pinout (J13) .............................................................................. 2-13
Table 2-13 - E7 GigBit Ethernet Interface Ports 1-4 Connector Pinout (J29-J32) ............................ 2-14
Table 2-14 - Port 1 (J22) & Port 2 (J21) Connector – 120 ohm Balanced Pinout (RJ48c) ............... 2-15
Table 2-15 - Overhead Interface - RS-232 (J20) .............................................................................. 2-16
Table 2-16 - Overhead Interface - RS-485 (J20) .............................................................................. 2-16
Table 2-17 – M7 Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-232 (J25) ....................................... 2-18
Table 2-18 – M7 Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-485 (J25) ....................................... 2-18
Table 2-19 – M7 Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-232 (J25) ........................ 2-19
Table 2-20 – M7 Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-485 (J25) ........................ 2-20
Table 3-1 - Modem LED Indicators ..................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2 - Modulator LED Indicators ................................................................................................. 3-2
Table 3-3 - Demodulator LED Indicators ............................................................................................ 3-2
Table 3-4 - M7 Front Panel Parameter Matrix – Modulator Sheet .................................................... 3-32
Table 3-5 - Modem (Unit) Parameter Detail ...................................................................................... 3-33
Table 3-6 - Modulator Parameter Detail ............................................................................................ 3-41
Table 3-7 - Demodulator Parameter Detail ....................................................................................... 3-46
Table 3-8 – Synchronous Interface Parameter Detail ....................................................................... 3-52
Table 3-9 – I7 - IP Interface Parameter Detail .................................................................................. 3-57
Table 3-10 – E7- Express Ethernet Interface Parameter Detail ....................................................... 3-61
Table 3-11 – G7 – Dual G.703/E1 Interface Parameter Detail ......................................................... 3-67
Table 3-12 – High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) Parameter Detail ................................................. 3-72
Table 3-13 – ASCII Characters Available for Unit Station ID ............................................................ 3-84
Table 3-14 - AUPC Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-101
Table 4-1 – Factory Default Parameters ............................................................................................. 4-2

NOTE: All appendices may not be present in manual. Some Appendixes may be shipped with the
option.

vi M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Description

Preface
Standard Designations
The M7 designation is used throughout this manual where references apply to either the M7, M7L or
M7LT modems. Where a subject is specific to one modem the “L” or “LT” suffix is used or the specific
differences in operation between the three modem versions are detailed.

Recommended Standard (RS) designations (i.e. RS-232) have been superseded by the new
designation of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) designations (i.e. EIA-232). The RS and EIA
designation may be used interchangeably within the manual and protocol documentation and have
the same electrical and mechanical meaning.

Electrical Safety and Compliance Notice

The M7 Series has been safety tested and shown to comply with standard EN 60950 Safety of
Information Technology Equipment (Including Electrical Business Machines).

The M7 Series is shipped with an external IEC filtered AC to DC power converter module designed to
accept a 3-wire mains connection consisting of an earth ground, neutral and line conductors. The
mating power cord should have a line cord and plug suitable for the country of operation. Installation
and connection to the AC power line must be made in compliance to local or national wiring codes
and regulations.

The external IEC filtered AC to DC power converter module is rated for a nominal operating range of
90 to 264 VAC. The unit has a maximum power consumption of 25 watts.

Never operate the equipment with the cover removed. Never remove the cover with power applied.
As a safety measure the power cord should be disconnected from the unit when preparing to remove
the cover.

Battery
The M7 contains a Lithium Battery. Danger of explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries in accordance with local and national regulations.

EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) and Safety Compliance

This equipment has been tested in accordance with FCC and ESTI standards.

 FCC: Part 15, Subpart B, Class A

 ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09) (Emissions and Immunity)
 EN 55022 (2010) (Emissions)
 EN 55024 (2010) (Immunity)
 EN 60950-1:2006 (2nd Edition) and IEC 60950-1:2005 (Safety)

To maintain compliance with these standards the following the precautions must be observed.

 The equipment must be operated with the cover and all cover screws in place.
 Do not remove the rear panel option plate without replacing it with one designed for a specific
option assembly.
 All rear connections are designed to have integral shielding on the cable and connector
assembly. “D” type signal connectors must have grounding fingers on the connector shell.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

Description M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (TTED)

In accordance with the TTED 91/263/EEC, the M7 Series should not be connected directly to the
Public Telecommunications Network.

RoHS Compliance
The M7 Series satisfies the requirements specified in the European Union Directive on the Restriction
of Hazardous Substances, Directive 2002/95/EC (EU RoHS).

Environmental
The M7 Series is designed to operate in an indoor environment. Operation while exposed to
precipitation, condensation, relative humidity above 95%, excessive dust, or temperature outside the
operating range of 0 to +50°C may cause damage to the unit and will void the warranty.

Maximum storage temperature is -20° to +70°C.

Do not operate the modem in an unsafe environment near explosive or flammable gases or liquids

If the M7 Series is to operation in a mobile environment, the user must take precautions to provide a
stable environment consistent with the equipment specifications.

Grounding
Insure good grounding practices. Where a ground lug is provided, the modem should be connected to
a good earth ground with low impedance cable in rack installations.

1-2 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

About This Manual

This manual is intended for use by personnel with reasonable knowledge of satellite communications
and earth station terminology. This manual provides Installation, Operating, and Maintenance
procedures for the M7 Satellite Modem and available options.

This manual is composed of several separable documents. The main body of the manual is
separated into several “Chapters” and “Sections”. The Chapters within the main manual are the
Modem Description, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance. The Appendices include the
Specifications, Remote Control Protocol and information on Options, Cabling and information related
to placing the Modem in service.

A Section is considered a sub-section of a Chapter. For example Section 4.1.2 is a numbered

section within Chapter 4. Page numbers include the Chapter (i.e. Page 3-14) and all Tables and
Figures will show the Chapter in the caption (i.e. Table 1-2).

This manual is available in a printed form and as an electronic “Portable Document Format” or .PDF
file. The electronic format is produced as a universal Adobe Acrobat readable file, and can be
requested directly from Datum Systems, Inc., or via download from the web at
www.datumsystems.com. The electronic format on the web is always the latest revision.

Revision History
Release Number Release Date Comments
Revision 0.02 02/27/2013 Initial Public Release.
Revision 0.03 06/01/2013 Interface additions and cleanup
Revision 0.04 9/16/2013 M7LT, E7, PtMP AUPC, and cleanup
Revision 0.05 05/29/2014 Add Events, Feature update, Firmware update, and
cleanup

Pen and Ink Changes Made to this Manual

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-3

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

1.0 Introduction
1.1. M7 Modem Description
The Datum Systems M7 series modular satellite modems (Figure 1-1) represent a major extension to
our seventh generation of innovative design concepts, proven and refined over fifteen years of
production. The M7 series modems are capable of independent transmit and receive of BPSK,
QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM and 16QAM modulated carriers. The M7 series uses the latest Digital
Signal Processing (DSP) technology and proprietary techniques to provide unsurpassed performance
at a low cost. The M7 series is a highly modular design made possible by higher integration and
smaller size. Impressive features are highlighted by this design methodology:

 The Standard chassis is a half-rack 1U (1.75” H x 9.75” W x 12” D)

 Individual cards within the chassis are replaceable to create multifaceted functionality
 Half-rack chassis can be combined to create multiple modems within a single rack unit

Figure 1-1 – M7 Series Modems

The M7 series is available in standard 50-180MHz IF or 950-2150MHz L-Band versions with

upgradeable “feature sets” within each version.

All M7 series modems encompass significant performance improvement over previous modems at
reduced cost. All options in the M7, M7L and M7LT modems are fully interchangeable with the
exception of the IF input and output frequency range which is selected and factory installed at the
time of order.

The M7 is designed for service in a variety of satellite systems and network types. Carrier operating
modes may be dedicated or shared. In a dedicated system two modems are set for continuous
operation with each other, but in shared systems the modem carriers are typically controlled by a
Network Management System (NMS) and operating in a controlled acquisition mode.

The M7 is designed to be easily integrated into either a master hub station or remote terminal via rack
mounting or placement on a stable flat surface. The highly integrated design allows two (2) M7s to be
built into a one 19” rack unit (1 RU) (1.75”H x 19”W x 12”D) mounting case. The M7 is an integral part
of a satellite earth station’s equipment operating between the Data Terminal Equipment and the
station RF equipment.

1.2. Network Types

The M7 is extremely flexible in regard to the network types that can be configured. Depending on the
network type, different baseband interface options are available that will maximize the capability for
the network. The three main network types are:

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-5

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

 Point-to-Point (PtP)
 Point-to-Multipoint (PtMP)
 Mesh

In a Point-to-Point network, the M7 provides the industry leading Eb/No performance and flexible
baseband interface options. This performance improvement and flexible interface support allows the
operator to update legacy networks without changing the teleport infrastructure. The additions of the
Ethernet/IP interfaces to the M7 provide the network operator with the latest technology needed to
extend cellular backhaul connectivity and Internet access to remote locations. When optioned with
the Ethernet/IP interfaces, Ethernet bridging and IP routing capabilities are internal to the M7 which
reduces the number of devices that need to be managed and maintained. A typical PtP network is
shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 – Point-to-Point Network

Point-to-Multipoint networks are used to connect a central location to multiple remote locations. The
central location, the Hub, will output a continuous carrier that is received by all of the remote sites and
receive the individual carriers from each of the remote sites on individual demodulators. Within the
shared outbound carrier will be all of the information destined for each of the remote sites. At each of
the remote sites, the M7 with an Ethernet/IP interface will filter, or route, only the information that is to
be received by that site. There is considerable statistical bandwidth savings by using the shared
outbound carrier in an IP based network because of the typical traffic patterns consistent with IP
networks. A typical PtMP network is shown in Figure 1-3

1-6 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

Figure 1-3 – Four (4) Site Point-to-Multipoint Network

A Mesh network is used when all sites in a network need to be connected to all other sites within that
same network with a single satellite link. This could be done by installing multiple PtP networks
between each network site, but as the number of network nodes increases, there is a dramatic
increase in the number of carriers that would be added and also an increase in the number of
modems required at each site. At some point, this becomes unmanageable and the alternative is to
use a Mesh network topology instead of multiple PtP networks. At each site in a Mesh network there
is a single carrier that contains all the information destined for all the nodes within the network. In an
IP based network there is considerable statistical satellite bandwidth savings by using the shared
outbound carrier from each site because of the typical traffic patterns consistent with IP networks. A
typical PtMP network is shown in Figure 1-4

Figure 1-4 – Four (4) Site Mesh Network

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-7

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.3. What’s New – This Modem and This Manual

The M7 is similar in operation to the previous Datum Systems modems, especially the PSM-4900 or
PSM-500 series. However, there are a number of significant changes in this modem series when
compared to the previous releases. The list below shows some of the differences between the M7
series and the previous Datum Systems modem products.

1.3.1. New to the M7:

 The base M7 series is only a single half-rack width (Figure 1-1). Consequently everything is
slightly smaller except the new LCD display which provides more information including soft keys.
 A standard 1 RU 19” rack mounted front panel plate allows mounting of one (Figure 1-5) or two
(Figure 1-1) M7 modems side-by-side.

Figure 1-5 – M7 Modem (shown in 1RU shelf configuration)

 The 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface on the rear panel now includes firmware updates, SNMP
remote control and a Web Browser based user interface. In the M7 this interface is separate from
any IP data interface option.
 An RS-232 remote control interface is also provided similar to previous modems for binary packet
control.
 Each M7 series version is capable of many software upgradeable “Feature Sets”, as described in
section 1.7. Many features of the modem are field upgradeable without adding new hardware.
 The M7 modems contain two slots for IF boards. These can include any combination of modulator
and demodulator. This means the M7 is capable of being a modem, a TX only modulator, RX only
demodulator, a dual modulator, or dual demodulator.
 There are two interface option slots in the chassis. There are currently two interface options
covering 3 interface types: standard Synchronous Serial, Vyatta PC based IP interface/router,
HSSI and a G.703/E1 Full and Fractional (Drop and Insert) interface either with or without the IP
interface. Multiple interface configurations are possible within the two interface slots. Please
consult factory.
 There is an option connector on the demodulator PCB used to add TPC FEC options. The
modulator is capable of all FEC options without additional hardware
 The M7 is powered by 8 to 36 VDC input. In a standard shipment, Datum supplies an external
power adapter module that converts 100 to 240 VAC to IPB at 24VDC.
 The M7 series is available in an L-Band terminal configuration in a 1RU configuration. This
configuration is the M7LT model (Figure 1-6) which provides 10MHz reference and DC power
through the interfacility cable to the Block Up Converter (BUC) and Low Noise Down Converter
(LNB).

1-8 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

Figure 1-6 – M7LT Terminal (showing front and rear views)

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-9

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.4. M7 Modem Assemblies

The M7 consists of four (4) main functional elements arranged on electronic printed circuit
assemblies, as shown in Figure 1-7. A simplified block diagram of the M7 is shown in Figure 1-8.

Figure 1-7 – M7 Modem Assemblies (shown with standard serial interface)

The modem assembly consists of the following major assemblies:

 The M7 digital PSK/QAM modulator with carrier generation in the 50 to 180 MHz range for
standard modem, or 950 to 2150 MHz in the L-Band versions.
 The M7 digital PSK/QAM demodulator accepting signals in the 50 to 180 MHz range for the
standard modem or 950 to 2150 MHz in the L-Band versions. The Digital Signal Processor
Acquisition subsystem is part of the demodulator assembly.
 The M7 microprocessor monitor/control subsystem.
 The optional M7 Data Interfaces. The standard serial data interface assembly contains selectable
serial electrical interface types – EIA-422, EIA-232 Synchronous, EIA-232 Asynchronous, and
V.35 on an EIA-530A 25 pin “D” connector. The modem can also accept special interfaces via an
alternate or additional interface cards such as G.703, HSSI and Ethernet.

1-10 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

The other two printed circuit assemblies are the Front Panel Control Assembly, and the common
backplane assembly.

In addition the main demodulator PWB can accept a plug-in sub-assembly for optional TPC Forward
Error Correction (FEC). All other FEC functions such as standard Viterbi, TCM and Reed-Solomon
are contained in FPGA on the modulator and demodulator assemblies. LDPC is an optional FEC set
which is loaded into the existing FPGAs.

Modulator Card Demodulator Card Controller/M&C Card Interface Card

XMT Out
Tdata 70/140
V.35/Intelsat
TData LVDS Low MHz
and FEC Baseband Signal Programmabl
Modulator Pass
Differential Encoder Processing e Attenuator
Filter
Encoder

Intf
Option Option Term Term
Interface
Card Connector
Serial,
IP or P1
HSSI
25 dB
Aux. Loopback
Con- DSP Aquisition Attenuator
Processor Control Modem
nection Processor
at J4 Reference
Oscillator
Ext. Reference In

Interface & Loop-

Back Circuits

Term
RCV In
Rdata 70/140
RData LVDS MHz

Doppler
Intf FIFO Buffer
Option Option In Clk
Card Interface Out Clk
Connector
Serial
IP Clock
HSSI P1
Control

V.35/Intelsat
and FEC Baseband Signal A/D Front end
Demodulator
Differential Decoder Processing Conversion AGC/Amp
Decoder

Figure 1-8 - Modem Block Diagram

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-11

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.5. M7 Capabilities
1.5.1. Inter-Facility Interface (IF)
The M7 series is offered with two (2) IF variations designed to meet the needs of various earth
stations.

 IF = 50-180MHz (TX/RX)
 L-Band = TX = 950-2150MHz, RX = 950-2150MHz

The standard M7 modem is equipped with a 50 to 180 MHz transmit and receive IF. This version is
typical for use in traditional earth stations with IF to RF up and down converters between the modems
and the High Power Amplifiers (HPA).

The M7L equipped with L-Band transmit and receive IF that provides optional 10MHz Frequency
References for the BUC and LNB. This modem is ideal for earth stations that are designed with a
block Up and Down conversion making it ideal for low cost earth stations.

The M7LT is an extension of the M7L that provides the LNB and BUC power supplies to power the
low power outdoor RF equipment. This creates the ability to build extremely simple and low cost high
performance remote terminals.

1.5.2. Sharp Carrier Technology

The M7 provides multiple setting for the modulation carrier roll-off that will allow interoperability with
industry standards and optionally to increase the number of carriers that can be placed in a satellite
transponder. This capability is referred to as “Sharp Carrier Technology”.

There are eight (8) filter roll-off options available to set in the modulator menu <Mod: IF - Filter Roll-
Off> and demodulator menu <Demod: IF - Filter Roll-Off>. These optional filter “Alpha” values
“0.40”, “0.35”, “0.30”, “0.25”, “0.20”, “0.15”, “0.10”, 0.08” and “0.05”. Figure 1-9 shows an comparison
of two (2) spectrum plots one which is 0.35 Alpha (red) and the other 0.08 Alpha (green).

Figure 1-9 – Spectrum Analyzer Plot of 0.35 verses 0.08 Roll-off factors

1-12 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

A significant benefit of this technology is the reduction in carrier pacing required on the satellite. With
a filter roll-off of 0.4, the carrier spacing would be 1.4 times the carrier symbol rate. When the carriers
are changed to a 0.08 roll-off, this carrier spacing can be reduced by more than 20% to 1.1 times the
carrier symbol rate. A spectrum analyzer plot that demonstrates this capability is shown in Figure
1-10.

Figure 1-10 – Carrier Alpha = 0.08, 1Msps x1.10 Carrier Spacing

For example, in a typical 36MHz transponder configured with 1Msps carriers with a 0.4 roll-off there
could be twenty-five (25) carriers. If the 1Msps carrier roll-off was changed to 0.08, there could now
be 32 carriers – a 28% increase in transponder throughput. Table 1-1 shows the relative
improvement that can be gained in a bandwidth limited 36MHz transponder be changing the carrier
Alpha settings from 0.4.

Table 1-1 – Bandwidth Savings Related to Carrier Alpha

Carrier Alpha 0.4 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.1 0.08 0.05
# of 1Msps
25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34
carriers
% improvement
0% 4% 8% 12% 20% 24% 28% 32% 36%
from 0.4 Alpha

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-13

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.5.3. Data Interfaces

The modem is capable of accepting interface cards that provide connectivity to a number of different
baseband interface types. These interfaces can be installed as a single interface or may be installed
in a dual interface configuration. As required, additional interfaces will be added to the M7 options list
to accommodate new capabilities. The currently available interfaces include:

 Multi-protocol Synchronous Serial Data interface (S7)

 Advanced IP interface with internal bridge/router (I7)
 Express Ethernet interface (E7)
 Dual G.703/E1 with Drop and Insert interface (G7)
 High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) (H7)

Installed option interfaces are automatically recognized by the modem, making them a selectable
option on the front panel or remote control protocols. Refer to the optional interface appendix for
detailed information on each of the interface options.

1.5.3.1. Multi-protocol Synchronous Serial Data interface (S7)

The Synchronous Serial Data Interface is considered the standard baseband interface for the M7
(Figure 1-11 and contains the drivers and receivers for one of seven possible data interface
standards. All interface standards are selected under program control via the front panel or remote
control. These standards are common interfaces used in the communications industry:

 RS-232
 RS-449
 RS-449/Unterm
 V.35
 X.21
 EIA-530
 EIA-530A

A single 25 pin “D” type female connector is available on the rear panel at J11 providing the terrestrial
data interface. The interface standard is electronically selectable via front panel or remote control.

Figure 1-11 - Synchronous Serial Interface

1-14 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

The M7 includes two changes to previous modems to insure proper operation.

1. The modem detects if no data is present on the Send Data input by a lack of transitions for
approximately 5 seconds and will produce a programmable alarm after that time.
2. Due to the higher data rates the M7 input circuitry automatically fine tunes the clocks to
attempt to place the data period at the optimal point with respect to the clocks. This also
helps tremendously when using the TT clock to create the transmit timing.

1.5.3.2. Advanced IP Interface (I7)

The I7 Advanced IP interface card provides the connection between IP Ethernet networks and the M7
satellite modem as part of point-to-point or point-to-multipoint data transfer. The I7 interface (Figure
1-12) contains a complete Linux X86 computer running the open source Vyatta router. This
processor/router combination combines high performance with standard control mechanisms similar
to Cisco or Juniper routers. The I7 is a full function sophisticated router and therefore requires
configuration in order for a network to operate properly.

Figure 1-12 - Ethernet Interface (I7)

The I7 provides the following features:

 Powerful x86 Atom processor based. Up to 1.6 GHz and dual virtual processors.
 Robust Vyatta Linux Operating System
 Industry Standard Vyatta Router overlay on Linux for control similar to IOS/JunOS. One major
advantage of Vyatta is that it provides a clean single point configuration interface and saved
configuration file.
 Modem command line and web control.

Refer to Table 3-9 front panel configuration and Section 3.8.1 for technical information on this
interface option.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-15

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.5.3.3. Express Ethernet Interface (E7)

The Express Ethernet interface (E7) card is a layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet bridged interface. The E7
supports connections between GbE networks and the M7 satellite modem as part of point-to-point or
point-to-multipoint Ethernet data transfer. The E7 interface (Figure 1-13) includes 4
10/100/1000Base-T interface ports (RJ-45) and a single SFP port that can be used to support an
addition Ethernet port or an optic fiber connection.

Figure 1-13 – Express Ethernet Interface (E7)

Refer to Table 3-10 for front panel configuration and Section 3.8.2 for technical information on this
interface option.

1.5.3.4. Dual G.703/E1 Interface (G7)

Dual G.703/E1 Interface (Figure 1-14) is a legacy interface standard that is used in Telephony and
Cellular Backhaul applications. The installation of the G7 (Dual G.703/E1) interface provides the M7
modem with an economical access solution for E1 network services over satellite.

The two (2) E1 ports are independent of each other except that they both must be selected for
Balanced or Unbalanced operation. Each E1 port also operates independently on transmit and
receive sides of each port.

Typical use of the G7 interface is in a duplex point to point link with a similarly configured modem at
the other end of the link. The setup of the satellite link is very simple because the modems at both
ends of the link are connected to DTE equipment with this same G.703/E1 interface type. Each port
of the G7 interface can be configured independently for either Full E1.

The G7 fully meet all of the E1 rate 2048 kbit/s specifications including the ITU recommendations:

 G.703 - Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.

 G.704 - Synchronous frame structures used at 2048, kbit/s hierarchical levels.
 G.732- Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s.
 G.823 - The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s
hierarchy.

1-16 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

Figure 1-14 - Dual G.703/E1 Interface (G7)

The Full E1 mode allows for transmission of a 2.048Mbps input data stream without synchronizing to
the imbedded framing of the E1 signal. In this case the port data rate though the satellite link is the
full 2.048Mbps of the E1 transport stream.

NOTE: In Unframed E1 there is no requirement for G.704 framing.

The G7 interface provides these key features:

 Single or Dual port G.703/E1

 Unframed & Fractional E1 operation
 Balanced or Unbalanced operation
 Data rate: 2.048Mbps
 Fully transparent signal conversion under unframed mode
 Clock Regeneration from incoming HDB3 or AMI formatted data
 Diagnostic Loopbacks for both Terrestrial and Satellite side

The G7 interface provides E1 alarm monitoring for all common E1 transport stream alarms:

 LOS Loss Of Signal. (All Modes)

 AIS All 1's at input port. (All Modes).

Refer to Table 3-11 for front panel configuration and Section 0 for technical information on this
interface option.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-17

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.5.3.5. High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) (H7)

The installation of the optional High Speed Serial Interface or HSSI Card (Figure 1-15) provides the
M7 modems with a high speed synchronous serial interface designed for higher data rates than are
possible with standard serial interface protocols like V.35, RS-449 and EIA530. This optional Interface
card is designed to be installed inside the main modem assembly in the option interface position. It
can be installed alone or as a second interface option within the modem.

Figure 1-15 - HSSI Interface

HSSI is an industry standard interface type that is usually associated with connection to routers, such
as the Cisco 3600 series, for higher data rates on WAN links. The standard itself describes
communications at up to 52 Mbps over cable lengths up to 50 feet. Since the M7 series of modems is
capable of up rates >52 Mbps, this optional interface allows full utilization of the M7 capabilities.

1.5.3.6. Dual Interface Configuration

The M7 allows for up to two (2) interface modules to be installed in the modem. The M7 controller will
recognize the installed interfaces and provide the appropriate functions on the control and monitor
interfaces. Below are some examples showing the rear panel view of dual interface configurations.
The combination of the Advanced IP Interface (I7) and the Multi-protocol Synchronous Serial Data
interface (S7) is shown in Figure 1-16. The combination of the Advanced IP Interface (I7) and the
Dual G.703/E1 Interface (G7) is shown in Figure 1-17. The combination of the Express Ethernet
Interface (E7) and the Dual G.703/E1 Interface (G7) is shown in Figure 1-18.

Figure 1-16 - Dual Interface Configuration I7 and S7

1-18 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

Figure 1-17 - Dual Interface Configuration I7 and G7

Figure 1-18 - Dual Interface Configuration E7 and G7

1.5.4. Bit Rate Timing Options

The Modulator and the Demodulator each have four (4) possible sources for their bit rate timing.
These clock sources may be used in various ways in a system implementation to provide correct
timing at a destination. Each of the clock sources can be set either from the front panel or from an
external monitor and control system. Refer to Section 3.9 for details about these options and how to
configure the modem for each of these timing options.

1.5.5. Data Interface Loop-Back Function

The standard and most optional interfaces also provide the data loop-back function. The data loop-
back can be controlled from the front panel or via remote control command. The data towards both
the terrestrial and satellite sides can be looped back individually by enabling this function via the front
panel or remote control

The data loop-back allows testing of the signal path connection up to the loop-back and back to the
source. Since both terrestrial and satellite sides of the signal path can be looped, the connection from
a local DTE can be checked on the terrestrial side while the connection from the far end DTE over the
satellite and through the modem can be checked on the satellite side. More information on use of the
loop-back modes is given in Section 4.3.

NOTE: Ethernet interfaces do not have this function.

 CAUTION: Enabling the “Data Loop-Back” functions will result in loss of traffic. It should not be
used in operating links without prior arrangements.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-19

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.5.6. Data Interface BERT Function

The standard interfaces also include a programmable Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) function. The BERT
is located between the M7’s satellite and terrestrial data loop-back functions. A new in the M7 is the
ability to configure the BERT to test the “Line” side external cabling, acting as a DCE device. The
BERT can be controlled from the front panel or via remote control command and provides extensive
test result data. More on use of the BERT functions and modes is given in Section 0 -Using the Built-
in BERT.

NOTE: Ethernet interfaces do not have this function.

 CAUTION: Enabling the “BERT” functions will result in loss of traffic. It should not be used in
operating links without prior arrangements.

1.5.7. Auxiliary Overhead Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer

The multiplexer is capable of combining a relatively low speed overhead channel onto the terrestrial
data stream resulting in a slightly higher combined or “aggregate” data rate through the modem. The
overhead channel is recovered at the far end. This added channel is termed variously an overhead
channel, Engineering Service channel (ESC), service channel, “async” channel or, in IESS
terminology, an ES to ES data channel.

The basic frame structure used by the multiplexer is that specified in the IESS-309 standard, Page
60, Figure 10, resulting in a 16/15 aggregate to through data ratio. This means that when the
multiplexer is enabled the modem aggregate operating data rate is computed as the terrestrial
connection (through) data rate multiplied by 16/15. The user sets only the desired through data rate
while the modem computes the aggregate rate required. The multiplexer is also capable of expanded
operating modes which include custom setting of the ratio of data to framing bytes.

The Multiplexer modes of operation are shown in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 – Internal Framing Options
Standard/ Overhead
Mode Notes
Compatibility Ratio
Disabled N/A 1/1
Standard IESS-309 16/15 Fixed synchronous ESC, No AUPC, No MCC
Full ESC and MCC including AUPC, Remote
Modem Control, 2 one-bit control channels (i.e.
Custom Modified IESS-309 Variable
backward alarm). Also variable data load per
frame.
Full ESC and MCC including AUPC, Remote
Modem Control, 2 one-bit control channels (i.e.
Advanced Datum Standard Variable backward alarm). Also variable data load per
frame. (only available with TPC or LDPC FEC
options enabled)

The ESC Data Channel can be set under software-control to either RS-232 or RS-485 mode. The pin
assignments for both modes are shown in the appropriate interface option subsection under Section
0. Not all interfaces provide an overhead channel but when this overhead is available, the signals
appear on the interface rear panel “overhead connector only when the multiplexer/demultiplexer
function is enabled.

The RS-485 Transmit Data Drivers can set to one of two modes:

 RS-485 2-wire
 RS-485 4-Wire

1-20 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

The “4-Wire” setting forces the driver continuously on while the “2-Wire” setting controls the output
into tri-state when the modem is not transmitting data, allowing multiple modem outputs to be
connected together. In the standard IBS mode only the “4-Wire” mode is available.

In Custom or Advanced mode a 2 wire receive operating mode can be selected for the receive data
into the ESC channel. In this mode the receive input is muted while the transmit data output is active.
In 4 wire mode the receive input is always enabled. In the standard IBS mode only the 4 wire mode is
available.

NOTE: Transmit and receive pairs are physically separate wires and must be connected together if
true RS-485 2 wire connectivity is desired.

The ESC Async Mode can be selected to Auto or Manual modes. In the Auto mode, the <Intf: Send –
Mux Overhead Ratio> is calculated based on the <Intf: ESC – Async Rate>. When the <Intf: ESC –
Async Mode> = Manual Overhead Rate, the <Intf: Send – Mux Overhead Ratio> is calculated based
on the <Intf: ESC – Async Rate> and the <Intf: Send – Mux ESC Rate>. The recommendation is to
use the Auto mode unless the operator is an expert user.

The user does not have to compute data framing variables to use the Custom or Advanced
Multiplexer Mode. When placed in this mode the entry parameters are the ESC and MCC channel
rates selected from standard asynchronous data rates (300bps to 3.5Mbps). The modem then
computes the proper relationship between the framing and terrestrial data rates to achieve the proper
operation. The modem also displays the terrestrial data to aggregate ratio.

NOTE: The Auxiliary Overhead Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer function is available in all of the
synchronous baseband interface option. This would include the Multi-Sync, Dual G.703, and
HSSI interfaces.

NOTE: The Advanced mode is only available when the FEC is set to TPC or LDPC.

1.5.8. Modem Control Channel (MCC)

In the synchronous baseband interface options, the MCC is available in both the Custom and
Advanced Multiplexer modes. In these modes the MCC provides for the AUPC plus the Remote
Modem Control (RMC) Channel and the Auxiliary control bits (RFC).

In the Ethernet and IP baseband interface options, the MCC channel is provided without the need to
setting a separate multiplexer or demultiplexer function.

1.5.9. AUPC Control Channel (AUPC)

When the modem is placed into either the Custom or Advanced modes, the AUPC control channel
becomes available. The AUPC operation itself is under control of the modem while the AUPC facility
in the MCC provides the channel for the information. This channel provides a minimum 300 baud
control channel in each direction to allow the modems at two ends of a link to interactively maintain
the receive Eb/No by controlling the power output at the transmit site.

Refer also to the AUPC operation description of the main manual in Section 3.10.

1.5.10. Auxiliary Bit Control Channels (RFC)

When the multiplexer is placed into the Custom or Advanced mode the auxiliary bit control RFC
channels becomes available. In the IESS standards, these are commonly referred to as “Backward
Alarms”. These consist of two single line or “one-bit” control channels that can be used to send
control information independently in both directions over the link. The input signals on these channels
can be either a contact closure or a logic type signals while the output is a form C relay contract set
whose state depends on the state of the input signal. The low input logic level is 0 to 0.4 VDC, while
the logic high level can be from 2.4 to approximately 20 VDC. The input is current limited to accept
this wide voltage range without damage. Higher voltages may damage the inputs however and
caution should be exercised. Pin connections for these one bit channels are shown in the connector
pinout of each interface in Section 0.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-21

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.6. Forward Error Correction (FEC) Options

The hardware for Viterbi, TCM, Reed-Solomon Codec, and FlexLDPC FEC types are included in the
modulator and demodulator cards, providing the M7 with basic functional capability for all standard
operating parameters including 8PSK TCM and 16QAM. The following sections provide a general
description of the characteristics of each of these functions.

All of the M7 series demodulators have a single plug-on option FEC card for an optional TPC function
or future FEC options.

The Table 1-3 shows the currently available FEC modes and the relation to the modulation types.

Table 1-3 – Modulation, FEC, and Code Rates.

Code
FEC FEC Type Rates R-S
Type Sel # (T) Option Sel # (O) Available Sel # (C) Option Modulation Modes (see notes)
BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK 8QAM 16APSK 16QAM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
None 0 N/A 0 N/A 0 l l l

Viterbi 1 Normal 0 1/2 0 l l l l l

3/4 1 l l l l l
5/6 2 l l l l l
7/8 3 l l l l l
Swap C0/C1 1 1/2 0 l l l l l
3/4 1 l l l l l
5/6 2 l l l l l
7/8 3 l l l l l
CT 2 3/4 1 lu l
7/8 2 lu l

TCM 2 0 2/3 0 l l

TPC 4 Advanced 0 0.453-16k 0 l l l l l

1/2-16k 1 l l l l l
1/2-4k 2 l l l l l
3/4-16k 3 l l l l l l
3/4-4k 4 l l l l l l
7/8-16k 5 l l l l l l
7/8-4k 6 l l l l l l
0.922-16k 7 l l l l l l
0.950-4k 8 l l l l l l

CT 4 5/16 0 l
21/44 1 l l l
3/4 2 l l l l l l
*TPC16k only 7/8 3 l l l l l l
0.95 4 l l l l l l

LDPC 5 Any 0 1/2 0 l l l l l l

Block Size 2/3 1 l l l l l l
256-16k 3/4 2 l l l l l l
Option 0~7 14/17 3 l l l l l l
7/8 4 l l l l l l
10/11 5 l l l l l l
16/17 6 l l l l l l

NOTE: The front panel selection number for each of the options is listed as the “Sel #”. For example,
the Modulation modes show the selection numbers 0 through 6, and the FEC Type, Option
and Code Rate selection numbers are listed in the column to the right of each item. These
numbers can be referred for front panel operation but are even more applicable to the SnIP
Telnet command line program named “M7ctl”. This program has specific commands that

1-22 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

allow entering either just the 3 digit FEC options or the full Modulation, FEC Type, Option,
Code rate and Reed-Solomon mode (MTOCR) in a single entry.

Additional table notes:

 TPC 4k and 16k restrictions apply to that line and Code Rate only
 TPC16k operates up to up to 51.66Mbps depending on the Feature Set and modulation
 The Viterbi CT modes, Rate 3/4 & 7/8, 16QAM are only for Comtech modem compatibility as they
only operate in this mode with R-S at 220, 200, depth of 4. R-S is auto-enabled
 TPC Advanced modes are Datum Systems proprietary implementations that require the TPC16k
option only for the highlighted lines. They offer superior performance to CT modes

1.6.1. Viterbi, Trellis Code Modulation Codec

Viterbi has been the standard high performance FEC used in satellite communications for many
years. It has only been in the past few years that new technologies have emerged which provide
more coding gain with reasonable implementations. Viterbi still maintains the advantage of fairly high
coding gain with very low latency.

Trellis Code Modulation or “TCM” is a standard part of the modem used with 8PSK at rate 2/3.

The Viterbi CT option mode allows interoperability with competitive modems for 16QAM operation at
rates 3/4 and 7/8. The CT mode at this setting defaults to selecting Reed-Solomon CT mode at n, k
and depth values of 220, 200, depth of 4 and inverts the data. This is a closed circuit mode that does
not meet normal IESS standards, but is necessary in order to link to those modems.

1.6.2. FlexLDPC FEC

The addition of the FlexLDPC FEC allows replacement of the standard Viterbi FEC selectively for
transmit and receive paths. The performance improvement achieved by FlexLDPC is the highest and
most flexible of any specialized FEC technology to date, outperforming TPC across all modes. For
example, the FlexLDPC at rate 1/2 is capable of operating at a sustained Eb/No of only 1.5 dB with
-9
an error rate less than 10
1.6.3. Reed-Solomon Codec (RS)
Reed-Solomon Codec places a second Forward Error Correction (FEC) process outside of and in
series with the existing Viterbi FEC. The two FECs are thus considered "Concatenated". In addition,
the data between the two FECs is "interleaved" which effectively reduces the possibility of multiple
consecutive errored block symbols, thus improving the Reed-Solomon Codec performance.

The performance improvement achieved by this combination is significant. For example, the BER vs.
Eb/No performance of concatenated Viterbi rate 3/4 coding with R-S is better than Viterbi rate 1/2
alone and it uses less bandwidth than the Viterbi rate 1/2 alone.

Reed-Solomon is a block oriented code, meaning that data is framed into fixed size blocks and
processed in a specific way. A full block must be received before processing can begin, thus adding
to the latency.

Reed-Solomon uses framing which allows the use of a synchronous scrambler resulting in slightly
improved performance relative to the self-Synchronized scrambler normally used.

A simplified block diagram of the Reed-Solomon Codec is shown in the Figure 1-19.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-23

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Transmit
Transmit Data Channel
Terrestrial Data
Channel Transm it Reed-Solom on
Transm it Reed-Solom on
Block Encoder &
Block Interleaver
Synchronous Scram bler

Control

Clock
XMT
IBS
Clock and Fram e Main Modem
Multiplex Proces s or Clocks
Generation Ass em bly
Option
RCV

Control

Clock
Receive
Terrestrial Data Receive Data
Channel Channel
Receive Reed-Solom on
FIFO From Block Decoder & Receive Reed-Solom on
Main Modem Synchronous Block De-Interleaver
Des cram bler

Reed-Solomon Codec Simplified Block Diagram

Figure 1-19 - Reed-Solomon Block Diagram

The available Reed-Solomon modes shown in Table 1-4 can be selected from the front panel or
remote control. The CT220,200 mode is a special compatibility mode and is automatically set by
certain CT FEC modes, for example when Viterbi, Rate 3/4 is selected when in 16QAM mode. It can
be over-ridden from the Custom Reed-Solomon parameter settings.

Table 1-4 - Reed-Solomon Modes

Terrestrial Data Overhead
Mode Compatibility n, k and depth Values
Rate Ratio
Disabled N/A 1/1
1.2 kbps to
IESS-308 IESS-308 9/8 126, 112, 4 (M4 modem compatible)
<1.544 Mbps
1.544 Mbps to
IESS-308 45/41 225, 205, 4
<2.048 Mbps
IESS-308 >2.048 Mbps 73/67 219, 201, 4
IESS-309 IESS-309 All 73/67 219, 201, 4
CT220,200 Comtech All 11/10 220, 200, 4
Allows setting the “n”, “k” and “depth”
Modified IESS- values for special requirements. Can
Custom All Variable
309 also be set for M4 compatibility to max
M4 data rate.

1-24 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Operation

The IESS 308 mode automatically adjusts the n and k factors dependent on the data rate. The
“Overhead” ratio is the ratio of the data rate at the RS encoder output to the data rate at the input. It is
defined as n/k. The modem automatically adjusts to accommodate the new rate.

The Reed-Solomon Codec function can be turned on and off under software control, and is
independent of the IBS ESC Data Channel enabling.

1.6.4. Turbo Product Codes FEC

The addition of the Turbo Product Codes (TPC) option card (Figure 1-20) allows replacement of the
standard Viterbi FEC independently for transmit and receive paths. The performance improvement
achieved by the TPC is significant. For example, the BER vs. Eb/No performance of TPC Rate 3/4 is
approximately equal to Rate 1/2 Viterbi and uses over 40% less bandwidth. TPC also provides better
bandwidth/power utilization than either Reed-Solomon concatenated on Viterbi or 8PSK/TCM with
Reed-Solomon.

Figure 1-20 - TCP Option Card

The modem offers extensive TPC capabilities including first generation 4k block TPC, with both
legacy Datum modem compatibility (PSM500) and Competitive Technology (CT) operating modes,
plus a newer second generation 16k block TPC. This second generation TPC offers superior
performance at the expense of more delay due to larger processing blocks.

The Datum Systems’ proprietary TPC “Advanced” mode has been optimized to provide the highest
performance available in any TPC on the market. These modes not only outperform other
manufacturer’s TPC, but also LDPC in many cases.

1.6.5. Special Codec CT Modes

The wide range of FECs available today and the possibility of many different operating modes, and
parameters for each, can make compatibility with other brands of modems extremely difficult. To aid
in FEC compatibility with other brands of modems, the modem offers special “CT” modes, standing
for “Competing Technology”. These modes use the same parameter settings as popular modems by
other manufacturers.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 1-25

Operation M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

1.7. M7 Series Feature Sets

Feature Sets create specific capabilities that configure the modem parameters to fit a particular
application. Selection of modulation type, FEC type, and data rate ranges are the components of a
Feature Set. Using the Feature Set capability allows the purchase of the lowest cost configuration
that fits the current application without sacrificing future advanced capability. There are three (3)
feature sets offered for the modem which apply to any of the IF variations. More detail on maximum
and minimum data rates are shown in Appendix A.

Table 1-5 - M7 Series Feature and Option Matrix.

Feature M7 M7L M7LT
Model # Model Model Model

NOTE: Table is TBD

1.8. 1:1 Redundancy Function (Future Option)

The modem is capable of operating in a 1:1 redundancy protection mode without the use of a
separate redundancy switch controller. Three (3) components are required to be external to the two
(2) modems configured for 1:1 operation.

 a combiner at the transmit IF

 a splitter at the receive IF
 a “Y” cable at the terrestrial data connection

With this connection scheme the switching is only performed on the outputs from the modem. The
modem IF and data inputs are always available at the modem allowing internal circuitry to determine
if one modem is correctly accepting and “locking” to the input signals while the other is unable to if in
a failed state.

The two (2) modems operate in a “non-priority” redundancy mode, that is, no modem is specified as
“primary”, or having preference when both modems are operational. The first modem turned on
assumes a non-redundancy mode until the second connected unit is powered up. The on-line unit
can be set to send its configuration information to a second unit via the front panel. The modems will
remain in this state, constantly sending status information back and forth until one unit indicates a
failure. If that modem is currently on line, it is switched off-line and the alternate unit is switch on.

The alarms that are used to determine switching criteria are programmable, and the first modem set
up for this mode automatically loads its configuration information to the second or “alternate” unit.
These features create a very low cost redundancy system that is both flexible and easily set up.

The modem is also capable of operating in 1:N and M:N redundancy switching schemes. The
necessary connections to monitor and control switching are available on the data connector itself in
the form of the modulator and demodulator fault outputs and the auxiliary RS-232 control port. The
alarm outputs are also available. The other facility provided to aid in these redundancy schemes is
the ability to save and recall configuration information. Thus a back-up modem can obtain and save
the configurations from 8 other modems and switch immediately to the necessary parameters to
replace any of those units by simply recalling that unit’s stored configuration. In addition, the
programmable interface and common physical data connector allows different interface protocols
between the primary modems.

More information on the set-up and use of the 1:1 redundancy functions and modes is given in
Section 3.14 - Built-in 1:1 Redundancy Mode Operation.

1-26 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Installation
2.0 Installation Requirements
The M7 Modem is designed for installation in any standard 19-inch equipment cabinet or rack, and
requires 1 RU mounting space (1.75 inches) vertically and 12 inches of depth (not including cabling
space) but only one half of the rack space in width. The M7 is shipped with an external IEC filtered
AC to DC power converter module designed to accept a 3-wire AC line cord and plug suitable for the
country of operation. Installation and connection to the AC power line must be made in compliance to
local or national wiring codes and regulations. The M7 may be placed on a table or suitable stable flat
surface as required.

 CAUTION!: There are no user-serviceable parts or configuration settings located inside the M7
modem chassis. When option card installation is to be done, DO NOT open the
modem case unless prime power is removed.

 CAUTION!: Before initially applying power to the modem, it is a good idea to disconnect the
transmit output from the operating satellite ground station equipment. This is
especially true if the current modem configuration settings are unknown, where
incorrect setting could disrupt existing communications traffic.

2.1. Unpacking
The M7 Modem was carefully packed to avoid damage and should arrive complete with the following
items for proper installation:

 M7 Modem Unit, L-Band Units may include an external BUC power supply.
 IEC filtered AC to DC power converter module with a six foot power cord
 Installation and Operation Manual plus other information on CD.

2.1.1. Removal and Assembly

If using a knife or cutting blade to open the carton, exercise caution to ensure that the blade does not
extend into the carton, but only cuts the tape holding the carton closed. Carefully unpack the unit and
ensure that all of the above items are in the carton. If the Prime AC power available at the installation
site requires a different power cord/AC connector, then arrangements to receive the proper device will
be necessary before proceeding with the installation.

The M7 Modem unit is shipped fully assembled and does not require removal of the covers for any
purpose in normal installation. All normal hardware configuration, including setting the data interface
type and IF impedance is under software control. The type of Feature Sets, FEC Options and
Interface Options installed can be read from the LCD display on the front panel under <Unit: Status>
column by scrolling down after initial application of power.

Should the power cable AC connector be of the wrong type for the installation, either the cable or the
power connector end should be replaced. The power supply itself is designed for world-wide
application using from 90 to 264 VAC (100 to 240 VAC +/- 10%).

2.2. Mounting Considerations

When mounted in an equipment rack, adequate ventilation must be provided. The ambient
temperature in the rack must be between 0 and 50 C, and held constant for best equipment
operation. The air available to the rack should be clean and relatively dry. The modem units may be
stacked one on top of the other to a maximum of 10 consecutive units before providing a 1 RU space
for airflow. Modem units should not be placed immediately above a high heat or EMF generator to
ensure the output signal integrity and proper receive operation.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-1

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Do not mount the modem in an unprotected outdoor location where there is direct contact with rain,
snow, wind or sun. The modem is designed for indoor applications only.

The only tools and accessories required for rack mounting the modem is a set of four rack mounting
screws and an appropriate screwdriver. Rack mount brackets are an integral part of the front panel
plate of the unit and are not removable.

The following interface connections should be available at the mounting location as a minimum:

 Prime AC power.
 A 75 Transmit IF cable with BNC male connector. (50 optional) or a 50 Transmit IF cable
with SMA male connector for the L-Band version.
 A 75 Receive IF cable with BNC male connector. (50 optional) or a 75 Receive IF cable with
SMA connector for the L-Band versions.
 A Terrestrial data interface cable to mate with the modem or installed interface option; either a
25-pin male “D” sub connector for all standard or appropriate connector for an optional interface
(such as G.703 or Ethernet).

2.3. Modem Connections

All connections to the modem are located on the rear of the unit: The connector definitions in the
following sections describe the connectors on the modem. Any connection interfacing to the modem
must be with an appropriate mating connector. Refer to Figure 2-1 for the location of the rear panel
connections on the M7 and Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for the prime power input location on the M7LT

Figure 2-1 – M7 Rear Panel with Synchronous Serial Interface Option

2.3.1. Prime DC power (J2)

For the standard M7 primary power is applied via an 8 to 36VDC input connector - J2. An external
power convert is used to convert from 100-240 VAC or -48 VDC power sources.

There are two (2) prime power options for the M7LT that are applied directly to the rear panel of the
chassis. These options are 100-240 VAC (Figure 2-2) and -48 VDC (Figure 2-3).

Figure 2-2 – M7LT Rear Panel with AC Prime Power Input

2-2 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 2-3 – M7LT Rear Panel with DC Prime Power Input

2.3.2. IP Control RJ45 (J4)

The RJ45 IP Control connection provides remote control of the modem via a Web Browser page or
SNMP. Refer to Table 2-1 for the pinout of the Auxiliary connector.

Table 2-1 - Remote IP Control Connector Pinout (J4)

Pin # Signal Name Use Direction
1 TX D1+ Transmit Data + Output
2 TX D1- Transmit Data - Output
3 RX D2+ Receive Data+ Input
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 RX D2- Receive Data- Input
7 Not Used
8 Not Used

2.3.3. Auxiliary RJ11 (J3) (Future Option)

The RJ11 auxiliary connector J3 is used for redundancy operation and contains all control signals
required for 1:1 redundancy operation.

2.3.4. EIA-485/232 Control Port - 9-pin female “D” sub connector (J5)
The modem has a command interface serial control port which can be configured for either of two
electrical interface modes of operation. Both are located on the rear panel 9-pin female “D” sub
connector J6. Connection to either the RS-232 or RS-485 is selected by connecting to the proper set
of pins as shown in Table 2-2, and setting the remote mode as applicable via the front panel control.
If a 2 wire RS-485 bus is desired, then transmit and receive RS-485 lines must be externally
connected together (1 to 8 and 6 to 9).

NOTE: RS-485 supports both 2 wire and 4 wire interfaces.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-3

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Table 2-2 - Remote Control Connector Pinout (J5)

P2 Pin # Signal Name Use Direction
1 Transmit B RS–485 Transmit Data (B) + Output
2 Transmit RS–232 Transmit Signal Output
3 Receive RS–232 Receive Signal Input
4 Not Used
5 Common RS-232 Signal Common I/O
6 Transmit A RS-485 Transmit Data (A) - Output
7 Not Used
8 Receive B RS-485 Receive Data (B) + Input
9 Receive A RS-485 Receive Data (A) - Input

Refer to Appendix C - Cabling Specifications for information on making a remote control cable.

2.3.5. Alarm Connector - 9-pin male “D” connector (J6)

The modem has two form-C dry contact alarm relays on board and an alarm connector located on the
rear panel, the 9-pin male “D” sub connector J6.

The two relays are designated “A” and “B” and the particular alarms that are summarized on each
relay are programmable from the front panel of the unit or via remote control. Connection to the A and
B relays is via the proper set of pins as shown in Table 2-3 below and programming the applicable
alarm entries via the front panel control or remote control. Non-Alarm is defined as the powered state
of the relay resulting in an alarm when power is lost.

The analog monitor output is programmable from the front panel to select Receive Eb/No, Receive
AGC voltage, or Transmit output power.

Table 2-3 - Alarm Connector Pinout (J6)

J5 Pin # Connection
1 Relay A - NO on Alarm
2 Relay A - Common
3 Relay A - NC on Alarm
4 Analog Monitor Input
5 Analog Monitor Output (1kOhm)
6 GND for analog monitor
7 Relay B - NO on Alarm
8 Relay B - Common
9 Relay B - NC on Alarm

NOTE: By convention “NO” means Normally Open, and “NC” means Normally Closed. Both
conditions are the non-powered, Alarm State.

2-4 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.3.6. The IF Input/Output (J7 and J8)

2.3.6.1. M7 – 50 to 180MHz IF Output - BNC (f) (J8)
The 50 – 180 MHz IF Output is located on a female BNC J8. The frequency, power level, and
impedance of this interface are programmable from any control interface. Please refer to the
specifications in Appendix A

2.3.6.2. M7 – 50 to 180MHz IF Input - BNC (f) (J7)

The 50 – 180 MHz IF Input is located on a female BNC J7. The frequency, power level, and
impedance of this interface are programmable from any control interface. Please refer to the
specifications in Appendix A

2.3.6.3. M7L – L-Band Modulator (M7L) L-Band IF Output - SMA (f) (J8)
The modem L-Band IF Output is located on a female SMA J8. The frequency and power level of this
interface is programmable from any control interface. Please refer to the specifications in Appendix A

2.3.6.4. M7L – L-Band Demodulator (M7L) L-Band IF Input - SMA (f) (J7)
The modem L-Band IF Input is located on a female SMA J7. The frequency and power level of this
interface is programmable from any control interface. Please refer to the specifications in Appendix A

2.3.6.5. M7LT – L-Band Modulator (M7LT) L-Band IF Output – N (f) or F (f) J8

The modem L-Band IF Output is located on J8, either a female N Type or F Type connector. The
frequency and power level of this interface is programmable from any control interface. Please refer
to the specifications in Appendix A and Figure 2-4.

2.3.6.6. M7LT – L-Band Modulator (M7LT) L-Band IF Output – N (f) or F (f) J8

The modem L-Band IF Input is located on J7 either a female N Type or F Type connector. The
frequency and power level of this interface is programmable from any control interface. Please refer
to the specifications in Appendix A and Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 – M7LT Rear Panel Connector Options (N Type or F Type)

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-5

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

2.3.6.7. L-Band BUC and LNB Power (M7LT Only)

The M7LT modem has internal power supplies that have the capability to provide DC Voltage via the
L-Band Xmt and Rcv IF cable to a low power BUC and/or the LNB. The internal relays under
processor control and can be enabled or disabled using the front panel or remote control. The
processor also reads the voltage and current applied to the BUC and LNB and can create alarms in
addition to reading voltage and current at the front panel.

The rear panel LED next to the L-Band IF connector show status of the BUC and LNB voltage as
shown in Table 2-4 and Figure 2-5. Figure 2-4 shows the Prime Power and IF connector section of
the M7LT rear panel.

Figure 2-5 – M7LT Rear Panel indicators

Table 2-4 - Rear Panel BUC and LNB Status Indicator

Indicator Color Meaning

Off Power sensed but disabled (disconnected) from transmit cable.

Green Power sensed and enabled (connected) to transmit cable

Red Power sensed and enabled but a fault condition exists.

2-6 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

NOTE: The internal AC or DC BUC power supplies in the M7LT can be changed in the field by a
qualified operator. Figure 2-6 shows the location of the BUC power supply in the AC input
power unit and Figure 2-7 shows the location of the BUC power supply in the DC input unit.
Instructions on how to acquire and install a different BUC power supply can be found in an
Application Note.

Location of the Internal BUC Power Supply

(AC Prime Power input / -48VDC output)

Figure 2-6 – M7LT Internal BUC Power Supply (AC version shown)

Location of the Internal BUC Power Supply

(DC Prime Power input / -48VDC output)

Figure 2-7 – M7LT Internal BUC Power Supply (DC Version)

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-7

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Table 2-5 – BUC power supply options

BUC Power Supply BUC Power Supply BUC power Supply BUC power Supply
Input Voltage Output Voltage Power Rating Max Current
90-264 VAC 24 VDC 100 Watt 4.2 Amps
90-264 VAC 24 VDC 120 Watt 5.0 Amps
90-264 VAC 48 VDC 100 Watt 2.1 Amps
90-264 VAC 48 VDC 150 Watt 3.2 Amps
90-264 VAC 48 VDC 240 Watt 5.0 Amps
20-60 VDC 24 VDC 100 Watt 4.2 Amps
20-60 VDC 24 VDC 120 Watt 5.0 Amps
20-60 VDC 48 VDC 100 Watt 2.1 Amps
20-60 VDC 48 VDC 150 Watt 3.2 Amps
20-60 VDC 48 VDC 200 Watt 4.2 Amps
NOTE: DC Power Input is isolated so it can be either positive or negative ground;

NOTE: All M7LT DC units are shipped from the factory with a five foot 3-conductor cable with mating
connector on one end that will allow connection to the main DC supply at the installation site.

 CAUTION!: VERY important that the polarity needs to be wired correctly

2.3.7. The Modem External Reference Input at female BNC (J1)
The modem External Ref Input is located on a 50 female BNC J1. The 1, 5, 9 or 10 MHz input
frequency of this interface is programmable from any control interface. A sine wave input level of +10
to –15 dBm is required for normal operation. Please refer to the specifications in Appendix A

2-8 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.3.8. Data Interface Options

The modem is supplied with an electronically programmable data interface assembly

2.3.8.1. Synchronous Serial Data Interface

2.3.8.1.1. Synchronous Serial Data Interface Connection (J11):
The connection to the primary data signals on the Synchronous Serial Data Interface is on a 25-pin
female “D” sub connector. The physical connector and pinout is per the RS-530 interface standard.
The electrical interface however can be changed under front panel or remote program control to
include the types of interfaces shown above.

NOTE: Connecting the Data Interface to other types of equipment involves building cables between
the M7 and that other equipment’s physical interface. Additional information aiding the
creation of adaptor cables from the modem’s 25-pin female “D” sub connector to other types
of interface connections such as V.35 “Winchester” type connector standard pin-outs is
presented in Appendix C - Cabling Specifications”

Table 2-6 shows the pin assignments for the selectable standard electrical interfaces.

Table 2-6 – Synchronous Serial Data Interface Connector Pinout (J11)

J11 EIA-449 Signal EIA-232 Signal EIA-530 Signal
V.35 Signal Name Direction
Pin # Name Name *(3) Name
1 Shield (GND) Shield (GND) Shield (GND) SHD (GND) GND
2 Transmit Data (A) – SD A (SD-) SD TD A Input
14 Transmit Data (B) + SD B (SD+) TD B Input
15 Transmit Clock (A) – SCT A (ST-) ST TTSETC A Output
12 Transmit Clock (B) + SCT B (ST+) TSETC B Output
3 Receive Data (A) – RD A (RD-) RD RD A Output
16 Receive Data (B) + RD B (RD+) RD B Output
17 Receive Clock (A) – SCR A (RT-) RT RSETC A Output
9 Receive Clock (B) + SCR B (RT+) RSETC B Output
4 RTS (A) – RTS RTS RTS A Input
19 RTS (B) + RTS B Input
5 CTS (A) – CTS CTS CTS A Output
13 CTS (B) + CTS B Output
6 Data Mode (A) – DSR DCR DCR A Output
22 Data Mode (B) + DCR B Output
20 TR (A) – DTR DTR DTR A Input
23 TR (B) + DTR B Input
8 Receive Ready (A) – RLSD RLSD RLSD A Output
10 Receive Ready (B) + RLSD B Output
Terminal Timing (A)
24 SCTE A (TT-) TSETT TSETT A Input
–
Terminal Timing (B)
11 SCTE B (TT+) TSETT B Input
+
18 Mod Fault Alarm OC TTL output 25 Output
21 Demod Fault Alarm OC TTL output 23 Output
7 Signal GND SIG GND GND SGND GND
Aux RS-232 Aux RS-232 Aux RS-232 Aux RS-232 Input /
25
Transmit/Receive Transmit/Receive Transmit/Receive Transmit/Receive Output

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-9

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

NOTE: Data Interface Connections:

1. The modulator and demodulator fault alarms are Open Collector TTL outputs used to
interface to redundancy control equipment.
2. The Shield is normally connected to the cables shield at one end of the cable only.
Connecting at the DCE end only prevents ground loop currents being carried on the shield.
3. The synchronous RS-232 connection is limited to 128 kbps.

2.3.8.1.2. Serial Interface Overhead Channel Connection (J10)

On the Synchronous Serial Data Interface, the connection to the overhead data is on an auxiliary
connector located on the rear panel, the 25-pin male “D” sub connector J10. The pin-out of this
connector is determined by the selected multiplexer mode. The pin definitions are defined in Table
2-7 through Table 2-10.

NOTE: The FIFO External Clock pins are an input to the modem. An input at the receive data rate
can be used to clock data out of the demodulator FIFO buffer. An input at the transmit data
rate can be used to provide a transmit send timing clock which the modem will phase locked
to (if within acceptable range). The send timing signal is still an output from the modem, but in
this case will be at the input signal rate. Both functions can be used simultaneously if the
transmit and receive data rates are the same.

Table 2-7 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-232 (J10)
J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
ESC Send Data RS-232 Standard Mode Input
2
Connection (synchronous)
ESC Rcv Data RS-232 Standard Mode Output
3
Connection (synchronous)
ESC Send Clock RS-232 Standard Mode Output
5
Connection (synchronous)
7 Ground Ground Ground
ESC Rcv Clock RS-232 Standard Mode Output
8
Connection (synchronous)
Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
9
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
15 Ground Ground Ground
17 Ground Ground Ground
Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
21
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level

Table 2-8 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-485 (J10)
J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
2 ESC Send Data+ (B) RS-485 Standard Mode Input
Connection (synchronous)
3 ESC Rcv Data+ (B) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)
4 ESC Send Data- (A) RS-485 Standard Mode Input
Connection (synchronous)
5 ESC Rcv Data- (A) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)

2-10 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

6 ESC Rcv Clock- (A) RS-485 Standard Mode Output

Connection (synchronous)
7 Ground Ground Ground
8 ESC Rcv Clock+ (B) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)
9 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
15 Ground Ground Ground
21 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level

Table 2-9 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-232 (J10)
J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
2 ESC Send Data RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
3 ESC Rcv Data RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
4 ESC RTS RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
5 ESC CTS RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
6 ESC DSR RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
7 Ground Ground Ground
8 ESC DCD RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
9 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
11 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay Common Common
12 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
13 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
14 ESC Alarm In A Alarm A Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
15 Ground (Return for Alarm A Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In A)
16 ESC Alarm In B Alarm B Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
17 Ground (Return for Alarm B Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In B)
18 RS-232 Input Not Currently Used Input
20 ESC DTR RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
21 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level
23 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-11

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

24 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output

Relay N.C. Normally Closed
25 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm, Form C Output
Relay Common Normally Common

Table 2-10 – Serial Interface Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-485 (J10)
J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
2 ESC Send Data+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
3 ESC Rcv Data+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
4 ESC Send Data- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
5 ESC Rcv Data- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
6 ESC DCD- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
7 Ground Ground Ground
8 ESC DCD+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
9 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
11 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay Common Common
12 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
13 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
14 ESC Alarm In A Alarm A Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
15 Ground (Return for Alarm A Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In A)
16 ESC Alarm In B Alarm B Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
17 Ground (Return for Alarm B Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In B)
18 RS-485 Input+ (B) Not Currently Used Input
20 RS-485 Input- (A) Not Currently Used Input
21 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level
23 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
24 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
25 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm, Form C Output
Relay Common Normally Common
NOTE: ESC Alarm In/Out Not Available with IBS Standard Mux

NOTE: ESC Send Clock Not Available with RS-485

2-12 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.3.8.2. Advanced IP Interface (I7)

The I7 IP Interface connector is on the rear panel (Figure 2-8) of the optional interface card.

Figure 2-8 – I7 - IP Interface Rear Panel

The IP connections for the primary transmit and receive data are on the RJ45 connector J12

Table 2-11 - I7 IP Interface Connector Pinout (J12)

Pin Name Description
1 TX D1+ Transmit Data+
2 TX D1- Transmit Data-
3 RX D2+ Receive Data+
4 BI D3+ Bi-directional pair C +
5 BI D3- Bi-directional pair C -
6 RX D2- Receive Data-
7 BI D4+ Bi-directional pair D +
8 BI D4- Bi-directional pair D -

The Console connector, J13, is a nine pin female “D” connector provides the user access to for
configuration of the internal Vyatta router.

Table 2-12 - I7 Console Connector Pinout (J13)

Pin Name Description Direction
1 Not Used
2 Transmit RS–232 Transmit Signal Output
3 Receive RS–232 Receive Signal Input
4 Not Used
5 Common RS-232 Signal Common I/O
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-13

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

2.3.8.3. Express Ethernet Interface (E7)

The E7 Express Ethernet Interface connectors are on the rear panel (Figure 2-9) of the optional
interface card.

Figure 2-9 - Express Ethernet Interface (E7)

Figure 2-10 - Typical SFP Interface Adapters (Optical and GbE shown)

2.3.8.3.1. GbE Ports 1 thru 4 (J29 - J32)

With the E7 Interface installed, the M7 is able to interface with four (4) Gigabit Ethernet ports via J29
through J32. The connector pinout for each connector is shown in Table 2-13.

Table 2-13 - E7 GigBit Ethernet Interface Ports 1-4 Connector Pinout (J29-J32)
Pin Name Description
1 TX D1+ Transmit Data+
2 TX D1- Transmit Data-
3 RX D2+ Receive Data+
4 BI D3+ Bi-directional pair C +
5 BI D3- Bi-directional pair C -
6 RX D2- Receive Data-
7 BI D4+ Bi-directional pair D +
8 BI D4- Bi-directional pair D -

2.3.8.3.2. SFP Interface (J28)

The optional SFP port provides an additional interface port that can be configured with an interface
available with a SFP adapter. The connector is compatible with the SFP standard.

2.3.8.3.3. Reference I/O (J27)

The Reference I/O connector is located on a 75 female BNC J27. This connector is used to provide
distributed bit timing reference over a satellite link. Typical use is for distribution of the master G703
timing within a cellular network.

2-14 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.3.8.4. Dual G.703/E1 Interface (G7)

The G7 interface has five (5) user interface connectors on the rear panel (Figure 2-11) of the optional
card. Refer to Table 2-14 for the connector type, signal names, and connector pinout.

Figure 2-11 – G7 - Dual G.703/E1 Interface Rear Panel

2.3.8.4.1. Dual G.703/E1 120 ohm Balanced Interface

The G7 interface offers dual G.703/E1 balanced interfaces presented on two (2) RJ48c connectors –
(Port 1) and (Port 2). The pinout for the two connectors are shown in Table 2-14

Table 2-14 - Port 1 (J22) & Port 2 (J21) Connector – 120 ohm Balanced Pinout (RJ48c)
Signal Name Description Direction Pins
SD-T Send Data Tip To Modem 1
SD-R Send Data Ring To Modem 2
RD-T Receive Data Tip From Modem 4
RD-R Receive Data Ring From Modem 5
GND Ground n/a 3,6

2.3.8.4.2. Dual G.703/E1 75 ohm Unbalanced

The G7 interface offers dual G.703/E1 unbalanced interfaces presented in two ways. For Port 1, two
(2) BNC connectors (J23 and J24) provide direct for the data interface. For Port 2, a connector
adapter must be used to convert the unbalanced interface signals on the RJ45 (J22) to unbalanced
(75ohm, BNC). This adapter is available from Datum Systems and shown in Figure 2-12.

Figure 2-12 – RJ45 to BNC adapter

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-15

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

2.3.8.4.3. Dual G.703/E1 Overhead Channel Connection (J20)

The G7 interface offers access to the ESC overhead data is on an auxiliary connector located on the
rear panel, a 9-pin female “D” sub connector J20. The pin-out of this connector is determined by the
selected multiplexer mode. The pinout for the overhead connector when configured for RS-232 is
shown in Table 2-15 and when configured for RS-485 is shown in Table 2-16.

Table 2-15 - Overhead Interface - RS-232 (J20)

J20
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 ESC DCD RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
2 ESC Rcv Data RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
3 ESC Send Data RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
4 ESC DTR RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
5 Ground Ground Ground
6 ESC DSR RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
7 ESC RTS RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
8 ESC CTS RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
9 RS-232 Input Not Currently Used Input

Table 2-16 - Overhead Interface - RS-485 (J20)

J20
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 ESC DCD+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
2 ESC Rcv Data+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
3 ESC Send Data+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
4 RS-485 Input- (A) Not Currently Used Input
5 Ground Ground Ground
6 ESC DCD- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
7 ESC Send Data- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
8 ESC Rcv Data- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
9 RS-485 Input+ (B) Not Currently Used Input

2-16 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.3.8.5. High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI)

2.3.8.5.1. HSSI Data Interface Connector (J26)
The High-Speed Serial Interface connector is a 50 pin SCSI-2 on the rear panel (Figure 2-13) of the
optional interface card.

Figure 2-13 – HSSI Interface Rear Panel

Connection between the Router and the modem’s HSSI interface connector is via a Cisco CAB-
1HSSI cable or equivalent. This cable has the same 50 pin SCSI-2 type connector on both ends.
Connect the cable and insure that the retaining clips are engaged on both ends. The standard HSSI
SCSI-2 type cable designed to connect between a DTE Device, like a router, and a DCE such as the
M7 modem is a 25 pair cable with shield. This cable is connected as a 1 to 1 pin connection between
the two male cable connectors. That means that pin 1 on one end goes to pin 1 on the other, pin 2 to
2, etc, through pin 50 to pin 50.

2.3.8.5.2. HSSI Overhead Channel Connection (J25)

On the HSSI interface, the connection to the overhead data is on an auxiliary connector located on
the rear panel, the 25-pin male “D” sub connector J25. The pin-out of this connector is determined by
interface board(s) installed in the modem and the selected multiplexer mode. The pin definitions are
defined in Table 2-17 through Table 2-20.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-17

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

NOTE: The FIFO External Clock pins are an input to the modem. An input at the receive data rate
can be used to clock data out of the demodulator FIFO buffer. An input at the transmit data
rate can be used to provide a transmit send timing clock which the modem will phase locked
to (if within acceptable range). The send timing signal is still an output from the modem, but in
this case will be at the input signal rate. Both functions can be used simultaneously if the
transmit and receive data rates are the same.

Table 2-17 – M7 Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-232 (J25)

J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
RS-232 Standard Mode
2 ESC Send Data Input
Connection (synchronous)
RS-232 Standard Mode
3 ESC Rcv Data Output
Connection (synchronous)
RS-232 Standard Mode
5 ESC Send Clock Output
Connection (synchronous)
7 Ground Ground Ground
RS-232 Standard Mode
8 ESC Rcv Clock Output
Connection (synchronous)
Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’
9 Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
15 Ground Ground Ground
17 Ground Ground Ground
Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or
21 Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level

Table 2-18 – M7 Overhead Channel - IBS Standard Mux - RS-485 (J25)

J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
2 ESC Send Data+ (B) RS-485 Standard Mode Input
Connection (synchronous)
3 ESC Rcv Data+ (B) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)
4 ESC Send Data- (A) RS-485 Standard Mode Input
Connection (synchronous)
5 ESC Rcv Data- (A) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)
6 ESC Rcv Clock- (A) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)
7 Ground Ground Ground
8 ESC Rcv Clock+ (B) RS-485 Standard Mode Output
Connection (synchronous)
9 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
15 Ground Ground Ground
21 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level

2-18 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Table 2-19 – M7 Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-232 (J25)

J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
2 ESC Send Data RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
3 ESC Rcv Data RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
4 ESC RTS RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
5 ESC CTS RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
6 ESC DSR RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
7 Ground Ground Ground
8 ESC DCD RS-232 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
9 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
11 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay Common Common
12 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
13 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
14 ESC Alarm In A Alarm A Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
15 Ground (Return for Alarm A Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In A)
16 ESC Alarm In B Alarm B Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
17 Ground (Return for Alarm B Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In B)
18 RS-232 Input Not Currently Used Input
20 ESC DTR RS-232 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
21 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level
23 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
24 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
25 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm, Form C Output
Relay Common Normally Common

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-19

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Table 2-20 – M7 Overhead Channel - Advanced/IBS Custom Mux - RS-485 (J25)

J10
Signal Name Use Direction
Pin #
1 Ground All Ground
2 ESC Send Data+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
3 ESC Rcv Data+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
4 ESC Send Data- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Input
Mode Connection (sync)
5 ESC Rcv Data- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
6 ESC DCD- (A) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
7 Ground Ground Ground
8 ESC DCD+ (B) RS-485 Advanced/Custom Output
Mode Connection (sync)
9 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘+’ Input
External Clock+ (B) or ‘B’ line. RS422 level
11 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay Common Common
12 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
13 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm B, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
14 ESC Alarm In A Alarm A Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
15 Ground (Return for Alarm A Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In A)
16 ESC Alarm In B Alarm B Relay, Low Activates Input, TTL, Internal 1mA Pull-
Remote ESC Up
17 Ground (Return for Alarm B Relay, Ground Ground
ESC Alarm In B)
18 RS-485 Input+ (B) Not Currently Used Input
20 RS-485 Input- (A) Not Currently Used Input
21 Primary Interface FIFO External Clock input ‘-‘ or Input
External Clock- (A) ‘A’ line. RS422 level
23 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.O. Normally Open
24 ESC Alarm Out A Backward Alarm A, Form C Output
Relay N.C. Normally Closed
25 ESC Alarm Out B Backward Alarm, Form C Output
Relay Common Normally Common
NOTE: ESC Alarm In/Out Not Available with IBS Standard Mux

NOTE: ESC Send Clock Not Available with RS-485

2-20 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.4. Adding or Changing the Interface Type

Up to two interface cards may be installed in a modem unit by removing the modem’s top cover
(Figure 2-14). First the interface option card rear panel plate is released from the chassis by removing
the Ext Ref In (J1) coaxial connector nut and washer. Second, remove any screws that hold the
interface card to the chassis. Remove the interface card by releasing the card from the connectors
on the interconnect board. If there are two (2) installed interfaces, the top card must be removed first
and installed last in the process.

Installation of the new interface(s) is done in the reverse order.

Figure 2-14 - Typical single interface card layout (Synchronous Serial Interface shown)

Once the new interface card is installed and the modem is powered-up, the main modem processor
will automatically query the new interface card and determine the type and options installed.

Most option interface cards completely co-exist with other interface types, allowing the optional
interface to represent one or more added interface types available. However, only one interface type
is allowed to be enabled at one time.

Installed interface card(s) are automatically recognized by the modem and an entry is added to the
Interface Option selection menu. Selection of the option interface then becomes identical to selection
of any of the standard interfaces.
2.5. Option Turbo Product Codes FEC Option Installation
The M7 demodulator contains on-board circuitry and connectors for adding a Turbo Product Codes
FEC Option Card. This card can co-exist with the IBS Multiplexer (and the Reed-Solomon function
also, but both cannot be used simultaneously).

Installation of these cards is not difficult, but requires removal of the modem from service and removal
of the unit’s cover, and should be accomplished only by a qualified technician. The modem
automatically recognizes the presence of the optional FEC card and provides additional front panel
and remote control parameter settings allowing control of the selected option.

NOTE: In some cases, when options are first introduced, a software update to the modems internal
program is necessary to allow use of the option. Refer to Section 0 - Updating Modem
Software. The Datum Systems M7 Update program will also recognize and install software
for FEC cards present in the modem.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-21

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Turbo Product Codes or TPC is available in three versions depending on the link requirements. The
three versions are:

 TPC4K which uses the same TPC chip as in legacy Datum modems
 TPC16K which uses a newer 16K block size to improve performance
 TPC20K board with both the TPC4k and TPC16k chips installed

Because of the larger processed block size, the TPC16K device has much higher delay or latency
than the 4K block device. The M7 can be ordered with any of these TPC options from the factory or
installed in the field by a qualified technician. Once installed, the TPC option card will provide added
functionality to the standard FEC functions already contained within the modem (Viterbi, TCM, Reed-
Solomon, and FlexLDPC).

The Turbo Product Codes option, when enabled, replaces any other FEC function. The Modulator
(Transmit) and Demodulator (Receive) functions of each option are also independent and can be
enabled and disabled as required.

The physical arrangement of the FEC slot is shown in Figure 2-15. The same size PWB is used for
the TPC4K, TPC16K, and TCP20K optional card.

Figure 2-15 - FEC Option Card Installation

2-22 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2.6. Redundancy Connection (Future Option)

Connection of two (2) M7 units in 1:1 redundancy is accomplished by using a special the data “Y”
cable specified in Appendix C - Cabling Specifications, an IF combiner, and IF splitter. The two
modems communicate with each other to determine the alarm status of each and force the “off-line”
unit’s data interface into an un-terminated condition. This allows both interfaces to receive incoming
data and clock signals, which are necessary to ascertain correct functioning. At the same time,
transmit and receive IF ports are also connected together through transmit and receive IF
combiner/splitter assemblies.

The major advantage to the built-in redundancy capability is its extreme low cost but there are
additional advantages.

 The second (or back-up) unit is sent its full configuration from the on-line unit eliminating any
configuration errors
 fully programmable alarm content that determines the switching criteria
 The single point failure of the switch in a classic 1:1 redundancy scheme is eliminated

Operation of the 1:1 redundancy mode is described in Section 3.14

NOTE: The two modems should be at the same firmware revision for proper redundant operation.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 2-23

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.0 Operation
3.1. Operating Procedures
Operation of the M7 Modem consists of controlling the unit’s operating parameters and monitoring
status and responses via one of the control interfaces. There are three possible control methods for
the modem:

1. Front Panel Keypad Control. (Section 3.2)

2. Command Interface Binary Control via rear panel 232/485 is discussed in Section 0.

Any of these methods may be used separately or together to monitor and control the modem unit.
Each of these three interfaces and their respective methods are discussed separately below in the
sections noted above.

Additional operating procedures are also presented later in this section on using some of the unique
features of the M7 that would not normally be set-up during installation. These include such items as
the FIFO buffer, built-in BERT, storing and recalling configuration information, AUPC, the analog
monitor output, redundancy and automatic recovery.

3.2. Front Panel

The M7 front panel is divided into three functional areas: the LED Indicators, the Keypad, and the
LCD display. The front panel of the M7 allows complete control and monitor of all modem parameters
and functions. The front panel layout showing the location and labels is shown in Figure 3–1

Figure 3-1 - M7 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

3.2.1. Front Panel LED Indicators

There are 10 LEDs on the modem front panel to indicate current status of the modem’s operation.
They are separated into two columns representing the Modulator status, shown in Table 3-2, and the
Demodulator status, shown in Table 3-3. Modem (Unit) status is shown in Table 3-1. The LED colors
maintain a consistent meaning. Green signifies that the indication is appropriate for normal operation,
Yellow means that there is a condition not proper for normal operation. Red indicates a fault condition
which will result in lost communications

When one of the Alarm lamps below is illuminated, the highest priority alarm condition is displayed in
the LCD window.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-1

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Table 3-1 - Modem LED Indicators

Indicator Name Indicator Color Description
Power: Green Indicates the modem unit is currently under power.
Indicated that the modem is online. In 1:1 redundancy
Online Green/Off configuration, (future option) this indicator will be lit green on the
on-line modem and the off on the modem that is off line.

Table 3-2 - Modulator LED Indicators

Indicator Name Indicator Color Description
Transmit: Green Indicates that the transmit output is currently active
Indicates an IF Loopback test is active and the carrier is
Green Flashing
configured to the “disabled” state.
Major Alarm: Red Indicates that the transmit direction has failed, losing traffic
Minor Alarm: Yellow Indicates a transmit warning condition exists.
Test: Yellow Flashing Indicates the modulator is involved in a current test mode activity

Table 3-3 - Demodulator LED Indicators

Indicator Name Indicator Color Description
Indicates receiver lock to an incoming CXR and data including
Lock: Green
FEC sync
Major Alarm: Red Indicates that the receive direction has failed, losing traffic.
Indicates a receive warning condition exists, either an incoming
Minor Alarm: Yellow carrier with a low input level or a low Eb/No (programmable
threshold), or a backward alarm received from the far end
Test: Yellow Flashing Indicates the receiver is involved in a current test mode activity

3.2.2. Front Panel Keypad

The front panel keypad consists of three areas: First, is a 10-key numeric entry with 5 additional keys.
Two keys provide for a “+/-” (change sign) and “.” (decimal point) function, three provide “Edit”, “Clear”
and “Enter”, and four. The “Enter” key on the lower right is normally blue while the rest of the numeric
keypad keys are gray.

The second area is a set of “Arrow” or “Cursor” keys used to navigate the parameter currently being
monitored or controlled. During entry, the cursor keys allow moving a cursor to individual digits of a
numerical entry or scrolling through the available options of a selection entry. The arrow keys are also
in blue.

The third area is the four selection keys located below the LCD display. These buttons select which
functional area or “sheet” of the display matrix is currently in use and are discussed within the LCD
display section below.

3.2.3. Front Panel LCD Display

The LCD display is a single entry window into the large matrix of parameters which can be monitored
and set from the front panel. The front panel display is graphical 240 x 64 pixel LCD display. The
display is backlit and the brightness can be set for two states: Active and Idle. The active state is
entered whenever a key on the front panel is pressed and the display will automatically go to the idle
state after approximately 60 seconds of inactivity. Each state may be set to different levels of
brightness based on the preference of the operator. The default setting is ‘Backlight Full’ in the active
state and ‘Backlight 2’ in the idle state. To change the settings for either state go to the <Unit:
Keyboard – LCD Active> or <Unit: Keyboard – LCD Idle> brightness parameter and adjust to the
desired values.

3-2 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

The display, shown in Figure 3-2, has four distinct areas showing current status information. The
upper left of the LCD shows the current area of use, such as “Status”, “IF”, “Data”, “Alarm” or “Test”
(for the Mod and Demod). The upper right shows the current parameter being monitored, such as
“Frequency”, “Offset” or “Bit Rate”. The middle lines show the current value of that parameter and the
bottom line will show the four legends that indicate the Modem’s functional areas. The type of the
active interface will show in the “Interface” location, for example “Sync” will be displayed when the
synchronous interface is active. At times this line may be replaced with status messages that are
longer than two lines.

NOTE: The front panel matrix functions like as three-dimensional multi-sheet spreadsheet. The
different “sheets” are selected by the buttons for Unit, Mod, Demod and Interface, while
navigation on a given sheet is accomplished using the up, down, left and right arrow keys.

3.3. Front Panel Control and Monitor Matrix

The front panel (Figure 3-2) can be used to completely control the modem setup and operating
parameters.

The modem parameters are arranged in four matrices:

 “Unit” - Unit
 “Mod” - Modulator
 “Demod” - Demodulator
 “Intf” - Interface

Each matrix represents a major functional area of modem operation (i.e. Unit, Modulator,
Demodulator, and Interface) while the columns represent groupings within those functional areas (i.e.
Status, IF, Data, Alarm and Test) and the rows represent individual parameter associated with that
function. Each matrix is 4 to 14 columns wide and up to 32 rows long as shown in the parameter
matrices example Table 3-4.

Figure 3-2 – Front Panel Matrix Navigation

Within this manual, the format used to identify a specific parameter is shown as <Function: Column
– Row>. For example, to get to the Modulator IF Level the method is to press the “Mod” key then use
the left and right arrow keys to access the “IF” column and the up and down arrow keys to arrive at
the “Level” parameter. This is shown by convention in this manual as <Mod: IF – Level>. Selection of
a specific value for the parameter will use the notation <Function: Column – Row> = value(#). The
value is descriptive and the # in parenthesis is the selection number key to press for optional
parameters, if applicable, in the direct entry mode explained below.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-3

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.3.1. Front Panel Matrix Navigation

A functional matrix is selected by pressing one of the four buttons below the LCD display. In response
the modem will highlight the particular button text selected.

Each individual item that may be controlled or monitored is referred to as a “parameter”. Parameters
are arranged within each matrix as rows and columns. The LCD display shows a single parameter at
one time. The four arrow keys (), (), (), (), allow scrolling through the rows and columns of the
parameter matrix or sheet. The left and right arrow keys scroll through the columns and the up and
down arrow keys scroll through the available parameters in each column. Both the columns and rows
“wrap around” such that scrolling past the last item in a row starts with the first item in the same row
again, and the same for columns.

3.3.2. Monitoring Modem Parameters

Any available modem parameter is monitored by simply using the function and arrow keys to display
the desired parameter in the LCD display. The item displayed will remain until changed or power is
removed from the modem unit. The display operates in real time, therefore when a currently
displayed parameter changes the display will change without operator intervention.

When multiple parameters could be displayed (such as when multiple test modes are currently
running or multiple alarms are present) only the highest priority item is displayed. When that item is
no longer valid the next highest priority is displayed. The priority of items is fixed within the modem
software.

3.3.3. Changing Modem Parameters

The process to change any parameter is a follows:

1. Select the functional matrix by choosing one of the four function keys; Unit, Mod, Dem and
Intf
2. Select the parameter to be changed using the four arrow keys to the right of the LCD
display. The Left and right arrow keys control the column of the matrix and is shown in the
upper left position of the LCD display. The up and down arrow keys control the row of the
matrix and is shown in the upper right of the LCD display
3. Press the “Edit” key to indicate that a new entry is desired (If the “Quick” keyboard entry is
enabled this step may be skipped)
4. Set the parameter via the numeric keypad or arrow keys
5. Finalize the data entry using the “Enter” key

Parameters take one of two forms:

1. Numeric entry such as frequency or bit rate;

2. Selection from a list such as selecting FEC rates 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8.

3.3.3.1. Numeric entries may be entered by performing one of the following:

 When a numeric parameter is displayed, it can be changed by pressing the “Edit” key, then using
the left and right arrow keys to select the first digit to be changed and entering a new digit.
Successive digit entries go to successive characters on the display, skipping over the decimal
point which is in a fixed location. Leading zeros must be used to enter smaller numbers than are
currently displayed, and trailing zeroes are used to eliminate trailing digits not required. The entry
is finalized by pressing the “Enter” key.
 An alternate edit mode is accomplished by first pressing the “Edit” key, then using the left and
right arrow keys to select the first digit to be changed. The digit is “scrolled” using the up and
down arrow key. Additional digits are pointed to using the left and right arrows and also scrolled.
Finish the edit by pressing the enter key. Overflow when scrolling up through 9 will increment the
next higher digit while underflow will decrement the next higher digit.
 Direct entry can be accomplished if the <Unit: Keyboard – Entry Mode> is set to “Quick”. In this
mode the current parameter can be changed by simply entering new information, which

3-4 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

completely overwrites the existing parameter. For example when viewing the Modulator Data Bit
Rate of 256.000kbps entering the digits 64.000 (including the decimal point) and pressing “Enter”
will change to that new 64kbps data rate. Note that a leading “0” did not have to be entered to
overwrite the “2” of the existing parameter.

The current input can be canceled by pressing the “Clear” key at any time before pressing “Enter”.
Failure to press a key for approximately 60 seconds results in automatic canceling of the current entry
and return of the display to the current setting.

3.3.3.2. Selection entries may be accomplished by one of the following:

 When a selection entry parameter is displayed, simply press the “Edit” key followed by a digit key
0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In this scheme “0” represents disabled, OFF, NO or the first possible choice. “1”
represents enabled, ON, YES or the second possible choice. “2”, “3” and “4” represents the third,
fourth and fifth possible choices. Then press the “Enter” key to finalize the entry.
 Alternately, when a selection parameter is displayed it can be changed by pressing the “Edit” key,
then using the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the possible choices. When the desired
option is displayed, pressing the “Enter” key selects the displayed choice and finalizes the entry.
When scrolling though the available options, an arrow in the left column position denotes the
current setting.
 Direct entry can be accomplished if the <Unit: Keyboard – Entry Mode> is set to “Quick”. In this
mode the current parameter can be changed by simply entering digit key 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 … and
pressing “Enter” to finalize the entry. Optional selections can be viewed by successively pressing
several keys to determine their value, then pressing “Enter”.

Following a valid input, the modem will store the new parameter into nonvolatile memory.

3.3.4. Automatic Modem Parameter Sequences

Certain parameters are dependent on other parameter settings. The M7 will automatically present
those parameters that must be set to properly achieve the first setting entered. An example of this is
when entering an “IF Modulation” mode change, the modem will accept that but next request entry of
the “Data FEC Mode”, then the “Data FEC Code Rate” finally returning to the original IF Modulation
screen. If only the Data FEC Mode were initially changed then only the following item in the sequence
would be requested. This insures that all of the necessary parameters are entered to enable any
mode dependent on other settings. Normal settings are typically displayed during this sequence and it
may be possible to simply press the “Enter” key at each succeeding request.

3.3.5. Finding Modem Parameter Limits

During parameter entry, the maximum or minimum value may not be known. The modem can help in
some cases by taking the parameter to its maximum or minimum value when you enter a value
greater or less than what is possible. For example, when all other parameters have been set, to
configure the maximum transmit data rate possible in the modem, simply enter a value like 10000 (for
10,000 kbps). The modem should beep, display “Set at max” and enter a value of 5000 (for 5 Mbps).

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-5

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.4. Web Browser Operation

Activate the M7 Web Browser by opening the Internet Browser on the computer and type in the IP
address of the target M7 in the address bar of the browser.

NOTE: Login security may be activated by setting up the “User/Password” parameter in the binary
interface. Once this parameter is active, the operator will be prompted to enter the username
and password (Figure 3-3) prior to connection to the M7 Web Browser. The default user
name is Admin and default password is Datum.

Figure 3-3 – Login Page

3-6 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.1. Page Sections

There are 3 main sections on all M7 web pages (refer to Figure 3-4).

 Status Windows
 Page Menu
 Parameter Window
The Status Window provides the user a summary status of the M7 that reflects what would normally
show on the front panel. Active Mod and Demod status is shown but color coded text (Green, Yellow,
Red). The center status screen will display the current summary status of the selected page (Unit,
Mod, Dem, or Intf)

The Page Menu allows the operator to navigate between the modem card set functions - Unit, Mod,
Dem, and Intf.

The Parameter Window is the section of the page that allows detailed status of every parameter of
the M7. The Parameter Window is further divided into sub-pages by selecting the “Tab” for the
desired function.

On any page where the user is able to make a parameter change, there is an “Execute & Save”
button on the bottom right of the page. If change to a parameter is done, the operator must click the
“Execute & Save” button for any change to be accepted..

Figure 3-4 - M7 Web Browser Page Sections

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-7

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.4.2. M7 Web Browser Page Screen Shots

3.4.2.1. Summary Page
The Summary Status (Figure 3-5) will be the first page that is displayed when the computer connects
to the M7 Web Browser. The summary page provides the user a snapshot of the current M7 status
and indicates the available interfaces. The status window cycles through the status of the Mod
Carrier, Dem Carrier, RX Eb/No, and RX Level.

Page Menu

Figure 3-5 - Summary Status Page

From the Summary Status page, the user may navigate to the other modem card set pages by
selecting the desired parameter page on the “Page Menu”. The available pages are “Unit”,
“Modulator”, “Demodulator”, and “Interface”. Within each page are tabs that relate to specific
parameter matrixes shown in Section 3.4.2.5.4.

3-8 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.2.2. Unit Page

The unit page is used to configure the common parameters of the M7. The remote control interface
parameters, the unit frequency reference, and other unit parameters are controlled in the “Unit”
pages. Figure 3-6 through Figure 3-12 represent seven (7) of the sixteen (16) Unit pages available to
the user.

Figure 3-6 - Unit Status Page

Figure 3-7 - Unit Reference Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-9

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-8 – Unit Events Log Page

3-10 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 3-9 - Unit Remote IP Control Interface Pages

Figure 3-10 - Unit Remote Serial Control Interface Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-11

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-11 - Unit HTTP Page

Figure 3-12 – Unit Event Page

3-12 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.2.3. Modulator Pages

The Modulator pages are used to configure the transmit section parameters of the M7. The IF, Data
interface, and other transmit parameters are controlled in the “Modulator” pages. Figure 3-13 through
Figure 3-16 represent four (4) of the eight (8) Modulator pages available to the user.

Figure 3-13 – Modulator Status Page

Figure 3-14 – Modulator IF Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-13

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-15 – Modulator Data Interface Page

Figure 3-16 – Modulator Event Page

3-14 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.2.4. Demodulator Pages

The Demodulator pages are used to configure the receive section parameters of the M7. The IF,
Data interface, and other receive parameters are controlled in the “Demodulator” pages. Figure 3-17
through Figure 3-22 represent six (6) of the eight (8) pages available to the user.

Figure 3-17 – Demodulator Status Page

Figure 3-18 – Demodulator IF Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-15

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-19 – Demodulator Data Interface Page

Figure 3-20 – Demodulator Event Page

3-16 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 3-21 – Demodulator Monitor Constellation Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-17

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-22 – Demodulator Monitor Spectrum Analyzer Page

3-18 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.2.5. Interface Pages

The active interface parameters will be shown in the Interface pages and are used to configure the
baseband interface parameters of the M7. The Electrical Interface I/O, Overhead
multiplex/demultiplex, Engineering Service Channel parameters, and other interface parameters are
controlled in the “Interface” pages.

Each interface type will have a different set of pages. Details of the parameters can be found in
Section 3.4.2.5.4.

NOTE: The active interface is selected in the “Modulator” and “Demodulator” Data Interface pages.

3.4.2.5.1. Serial Synchronous Interface Pages

Figure 3-23 through Figure 3-28 represent six (6) of the eight (8) pages Serial Synchronous Interface
pages available to the user.

Figure 3-23 - Serial Synchronous Interface Status Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-19

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-24 - Serial Synchronous Interface I/O Page

Figure 3-25 - Serial Synchronous Interface Overhead Mux/Demux Page

3-20 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 3-26 - Serial Synchronous Interface ESC Interface Page

Figure 3-27 - Serial Synchronous Interface Test Configuration Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-21

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-28 – Serial Synchronous Interface Event Page

3-22 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.2.5.2. I7 Interface Screens

Figure 3-29 through Figure 3-33 represent five (5) of the eight (8) I7 Interface pages available to the
user.

Figure 3-29 – I7 Interface Status Page

Figure 3-30 - I7 Interface IP Configuration Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-23

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-31 – I7 Interface MCC Configuration Page

Figure 3-32 – I7 Interface Event Page

3-24 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 3-33 - I7 Interface Statistics Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-25

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.4.2.5.3. E7 Interface Screens

Figure 3-34 through Figure 3-38 represent five (5) of the eleven (11) E7 Interface pages available to
the user.

Figure 3-34 – E7 Interface Status Page

Figure 3-35 - E7 Interface Events Page

3-26 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 3-36 - E7 Interface I/O Port Configuration Page

Figure 3-37 - E7 Interface QoS Configuration Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-27

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-38 - E7 Interface Statistics Page

3-28 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.4.2.5.4. Dual G.703 Interface Screens

Figure 3-39 through Figure 3-42 represent four (4) of the eleven (11) Dual G.703 Interface pages
available to the user.

Figure 3-39 – Dual G.703 Interface Status Page

Figure 3-40 – Dual G.703 Interface Send Mux Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-29

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Figure 3-41 – Dual G.703 I/O Port 1 Page (showing D&I selections)

3-30 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 3-42 – Dual G.703 Interface Event Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-31

 Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.5. Front Panel Monitor and Control Parameters

Parameter matrices are available from the front panel. Within the tables following, parameters that
appear shaded are only accessible when the modem is configured to use those parameters. For
example, those parameters pertaining to the AUPC are only available when the AUPC is enabled,
and those pertaining to the Reed-Solomon Codec will appear only if the Reed-Solomon Codec is
installed and enabled. There may also be some parameters or parameter sections that will be a future
option and will be identified as such within each detailed parameter matrix table.

In the example of the M7 Modulator Parameter Matrix (Table 3-4) the top gray row represents column
headers, which are shown on the LCD display in the upper left. Items below the header are row
parameter names shown in the upper right of the LCD. Columns are navigated using the left and right
arrow keys while rows are navigated using the up and down arrow keys. All other parameter matrices
navigate in the same manner.

Table 3-4 - M7 Front Panel Parameter Matrix – Modulator Sheet

Status IF Data BUC Event Alarm Test Feature
Carrier BUC Xmt Freq Bit Rate Power Event Carrier Modulation BR Limit
BUC Frequency Symbol Rate Current AUPC AUPC Total BW Modulation
Interface BUC Xmt Level Rate Entry Mode 10 MHz Ref BUC Test Active FEC
Test Level Send Interface LO Freq BUC FSK Hardware Activation
BUC Pwr Opt Output FEC Mode Xmt Frequency Minor BUC Power
HW Type Modulation FEC Option Xmt Gain Major BUC Cr Max
HW ID Spectrum FEC Code Rate Xmt Level Max Test Active BUC Cr Min
HW S/N Filter Mode RS Mode FSK Rmt M&C Hardware BUC FSK
Filter Alpha RS (n) Rmt Parameter 1
AUPC Mode RS (k) Rmt Parameter 2
AUPC Eb/No RS Depth Rmt Parameter 3
AUPC Max Lvl Dif Encoder
AUPC Min Lvl Scrambler
Mute
Impedance

The tables below are organized with general “Rules of Thumb” which aid navigation.

1. The “Status” columns are generally read only, providing status on specific areas of modem
operation.
2. The Modulator and Demodulator matrixes use common column designations. A current
parameter in one area can be immediately accessed in the other by pressing the appropriate
“Mod” or “Dem” button. For example when viewing the Mod Bit Rate, the Demod Bit Rate is
accessed by simply pressing the “Dem” button.
3. The “Alarm” columns existing in all four matrixes and represents the disposition of alarm
information from that source. Therefore the <Demod: Alarm – CXR Lock> sets the
disposition of the Demodulator Carrier Lock Alarm as either None, to Alarm Relay A, to
Alarm Relay B, or to Alarm Relay A & B.
4. The “Test” columns existing in all four matrixes and represents the control and display of test
information for that area. The top entries in the Test column contain tests which can be
enabled or disabled if available. The lower rows represent measurements of parameters and
are read only. Active tests enabled in these columns generate flashing “Test” LED lamps in
appropriate areas.

NOTE: Word spelling is purposely truncated to fit in available LCD display window.
Other columns may be added by options added to the modem or software.
Redundancy parameters are only shown when connected to another unit in redundancy
mode.

3-32 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Within Table 3-5 through Table 3-12 are descriptions of the parameters available from the front panel
and entry in detail. The grayed separators delineate column divisions in the area matrix. A gray
highlighted parameter indicates that this parameter is not available unless a preceding parameter is
enabled or set to require those parameters, or optional hardware is installed that uses that particular
parameter. Parameters will also be added as new options are installed. A blue highlighted section
indicates that that parameter is a future option and is not available at the current manual release.

Table 3-5 - Modem (Unit) Parameter Detail

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status Modem Read Only Read Only Mod & Demod Status
Locked & Sending, Ok
Status Redundancy Read Only Future Option
(Future Option)
Status Reference Read Only Not changeable Reference source and status
Internal, Ok
Status IP Control Port Read Only Not changeable IP Control Port Status
Connected, 100 Mb Fdx
Status Station ID Alpha – Entered as ASCII for up to 16 Station Name for user
San Jose #56 Numeric characters
Status Time Time Entered as 24 hour time Current Time
17:24:59 format
Status Date Date Entered current date in Current Date
09/10/12 mm/dd/yy format
Status Model Read Only Read from Installed Option Modem Model Number
M7 Series
Status Controller ID Read Only Read from Installed Option ID of Installed Controller in
M7009001A-1r1.00 Slot 0
Status RF 1 ID Read Only Read from Installed Option Installed Modulator or
M709002A-1r1.00 Demodulator in RF Slot 1
Status RF 2 ID Read Only Read from Installed Option Installed Modulator or
M709004A-1r1.00 Demodulator in RF Slot 2
Status Interface 1 ID Read Only Read from Installed Option Installed Interface Option in
M709018A-1r1.05 Interface Slot 1
Status Interface 2 ID Read Only Read from Installed Option Installed Interface Option in
M709013A-1r1.00 Interface Slot 2
Status Software Version Read Only Read from Installed Option Modem Software Version
2.17s Created Aug 14 2013
Status Hardware S/N Read Only Read from Installed Option Modem Serial Number
1021004

Event Log Last Event Read Only Press “Edit” then use the Log of events based on the
Intf Hardware OK up/dn arrows to scroll through configuration of the Event
@ 2014-05-15 03:21:00.85 the logged events menu in each functional area.
Event Log Total Events Read Only Press “Edit” then “Enter” to # of Events logged based on
18 clear the logged events the configuration of the Event
menu in each functional area.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-33

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Event Log Debounce Time Numeric 0.5 to 600 seconds Configuration of a filter in the
5.0 Sec Event log to set the time for
logging and display of
consecutive instances of the
same event.
Event Log Send Alert To Selection 0 = Disable Setting to determine the alert
Disabled 1 = SNMP trap action to take when there is
2 = Email an event logged based on the
3 = SNMP Trap & Email configuration of the Event
4 = Future Option menu in each functional area
5 = Future Option
6 = MCC Port
Event Log Activity Selection 0 = None Setting to determine the front
None 1 = Beep panel alert action to take
2 = Blink Online Lamp when there is an event logged
3 = Beep & Blink Online based on the configuration of
the Event menu in each
functional area

Redundancy Mode Selection Future Option

(Future Option)

Config Recall Selection/ 1 to 99 Location number of a stored

Factory, 1 to 99 Numeric modem configuration to recall.
Config Store Selection/ 1 to 99 Location number to store the
Factory, 1 to 99 Numeric current configuration to recall
at a later time.
Config Auto Restore Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable Set a modem configuration
Disabled defined in the “Config Restore
#” menu, based on loss of rcv
carrier for the time set in the
“Config Restore After” menu.
This can be referred to as a
’user default configuration’
Config Restore After Numeric 1 to 14,400 seconds Time after loss of rcv carrier
30 Sec to restore this configuration.
Config Restore # Numeric 0 = Disabled, 0 to 99 Setting the configuration to
Disabled use for the “Auto Restore”
Config Power-Up Selection/ 0 = Last, 0 to 99 Behavior on power-up. Either
Last Numeric the last settings or try to lock
using one of the stored
configurations.

Front Panel Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Front Panel Keyboard access

Full Access 1 = Read Only, control.
2 = Full Access
Front Panel Entry Selection 0 = Quick, Front Panel Keyboard Entry
Quick 1 = Edit Only method.
2 = Confirm Quick is the normal default
mode. Refer to Section 3.3.3

3-34 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Front Panel LCD Active Selection 0 = 13%, 1 = 25%, 2 = 38%, 3 Active level of LCD backlight
Backlight Full = 50%, 4 = 63%, 5 = 75%, 6 =
88%, 7 = Full
Front Panel LCD Idle Selection 0 = off, 1 = 13%, 2 = 25%, 3 = Idle level of LCD backlight
25% 38%, 4 = 50%
Front Panel Activity Selection 0 = None, Audible “beep” and/or “Online”
Beep 1 = Beep, LED Blink on front panel key
2 = Blink Online Lamp, press.
3 = Beep & Blink Online

HTTP Server Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Control access and mode to

Full Access 1 = Read Only, the Web Browser.
2 = Full Access.
HTTP Read User Name Alpha – Enter up to 24 characters HTTP read only access user
Admin Numeric name
HTTP Read Password Alpha – Enter up to 24 characters HTTP read only access
Guest Numeric password
HTTP Full User Name Alpha – Enter up to 24 characters HTTP full access user name
Admin Numeric
HTTP Full Password Alpha – Enter up to 24 characters HTTP full access password
Datum Numeric
HTTP Activity Selection 0 = None, Audible “beep” and/or “Online”
Blink Online Lamp 1 = Beep, LED Blink on HTTP port
2 = Blink Online Lamp, activity.
3 = Beep & Blink Online
HTTP Web Version Read Only Read from Web Browser Display of the current Web
1.1.1q Browser version.

SNMP Server Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Control access and mode to

Full Access 1 = Read Only, the SNMP Server
2 = Full Access.
SNMP Server Type Selection 0 = V1 Set the SNMP Server type
V2c 1 = V2c
SNMP Server Port Number Numeric 1 to 65535 Set the Internet socket port
161 161 = IANA number for the SNMP server
SNMP Read Only Community Alpha – Up to 24 characters and can Set the Read-Only community
public Numeric contain any combination of name for authentication for
alphanumeric characters, SNMP traffic.
hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_).
SNMP Read/Write Community Alpha – Up to 24 characters and can Set the Read-Write
private Numeric contain any combination of community name for
alphanumeric characters, authentication for SNMP
hyphens (-), and underscore traffic.
characters (_).

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-35

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
SNMP Trap Community Alpha – Up to 24 characters and can Set the Trap community name
datum Numeric contain any combination of for authentication for SNMP
alphanumeric characters, traffic.
hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_).
SNMP Trap Address Numeric Enter IPv4 address Set the IP Address for the
192.168.2.101 SNMP Trap
SNMP Trap Port Number Numeric 1 to 65535 Set the Internet socket port
162 162 = IANA number for the SNMP trap
SNMP Trap Keep-Alive Numeric 0 = Disable Disable or set the time for the
Disable 1 to 99999 Sec Trap message to the SNMP
host to ensure that the link
between them is operational.
SNMP Server Activity Selection 0 = None, Audible “beep” and/or “Online”
None 1 = Beep, LED Blink on SNMP port
2 = Blink Online Lamp, activity.
3 = Beep & Blink Online
SNMP MIB Version Read Only N/A Read only indication of the
1.0.3h MIB version

IP Control DHCP Selection 0 = Disable, IP Address of the IP Control

Enable 1 = Enable Port is selected via DHCP or
manually
IP Control Address Numeric Enter IPv4 address If DHCP is Disabled, manually
192.168.002.122 enter the IP Control Port IPv4
Address
IP Control Network Mask Numeric Enter IPv4 Network Subnet If DHCP is Disabled, manually
255.255.255.000 Mask enter the IP Control Port IPv4
Subnet Mask
IP Control Gateway Numeric Enter IPv4 Default Gateway If DHCP is Disabled, manually
___.___.___.___ Address (can remain blank) enter the IP Control Port IPv4
Default Gateway
IP Control DNS 1 Numeric Enter IPv4 Domain Name If DHCP is Disabled, manually
208.067.222.222 Server Address (can remain enter the IP Control Port IPv4
blank) DNS1 Server Address
IP Control DNS 2 Numeric Enter IPv4 Domain Name If DHCP is Disabled, manually
208.067.220.220 Server Address (can remain enter the IP Control Port IPv4
blank) DNS 2 Server Address
IP Control M&C Server Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Control access and mode of
Full Access 1 = Read Only, the UDP packet protocol.
2 = Full Access.
IP Control M&C Port Number Numeric 200 to 65535 UDP Port number that is used
9101 for modem control

3-36 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
IP Control M&C Remote Path Numeric Enter IPv4 address This address is used with the
192.168.002.201 Demod IF AUPC Remote
Path setting of “Out IP Control
Port” to set the proper
destination address for the
MCC data that is received by
the demodulator.
IP Control M&C Ext Device Numeric Enter IPv4 address (can This address is set to identify
___.___.___.___ remain blank) an external device that is to
receive UDP packets.
IP Control M&C Activity Selection 0 = None, Audible “beep” and/or “Online”
None 1 = Beep, LED Blink on IP Control M&C
2 = Blink Online Lamp, port activity.
3 = Beep & Blink Online
Remote IP MAC Address Read Only Not changeable Displays the MAC address of
00:19:78:00:0a:9e the modem controller

Control RS-232 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Remote control access mode

Full Access 1 = Read Only, allowed
2 = Full Access.
Control RS-232 Protocol Selection 0 = VT100, Remote control mode type
M7 Binary Packet 1 = Quiet VT100,
2 = M7 Binary Packet,
Control RS-232 Address Numeric 0 to 254 Address used to access this
1 0 = address disabled unit via remote control and
255 = global USB packets.
Control RS-232 Rate Selection 0 to 8 selects 300 to 57,600 Remote port bit rate
9600 bps bits per second.
Control RS-232 Format Selection 0 = N,8,1 Remote control data/stop bits
N,8,1 1 = E,8,1 and parity. Always 8 data bits
2 = O,8,1 and 1 stop bit. N= No Parity,
3 = M,8,1 E = Even, M = Mark,
4 = S,8,1 S = Space.
Control RS-232 Activity Selection 0 = None, Audible “beep” and/or “Online”
Blink Online Lamp 1 = Beep, LED Blink on Remote port
2 = Blink Online Lamp, activity.
3 = Beep & Blink Online
Control RS-485 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Remote control access mode
Full Access 1 = Read Only, allowed
2 = Full Access.
Control RS-485 Protocol Selection 0 = VT100, Remote control mode type
M7 Binary Packet 1 = Quiet VT100,
2 = Binary Packet,
Control RS-485 Address Numeric 0 to 255 Address used to access this
101 0 = address disabled unit via remote control and
255 = global USB packets.
Control RS-485 Rate Selection 0 to 8 selects 300 to 57,600 Remote port bit rate
9600 bps bits per second.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-37

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Control RS-485 Format Selection 0 = N,8,1 Remote control data/stop bits
N,8,1 1 = E,8,1 and parity. Always 8 data bits
2 = O,8,1 and 1 stop bit. N= No Parity,
3 = M,8,1 E = Even, M = Mark,
4 = S,8,1 S = Space.
Control RS-485 Activity Selection 0 = None, Audible “beep” and/or “Online”
Blink Online Lamp 1 = Beep, LED Blink on Remote port
2 = Blink Online Lamp, activity.
3 = Beep & Blink Online

Reference Source Selection 0 = Internal, 1 = External Rear panel external

External reference.
Reference Frequency Selection 0 =1.0, Reference input frequency at
10.000MHz 1 =2.0, rear panel. Only available if
2 =5.0, set to external reference.
3 =10.0 MHz
Reference Fine Tune Numeric +127 to -127 Internal reference fine
-11 adjustment. Only available is
set to internal reference

Monitor Mode Selection 0 =Dmd CXR Level, Selects source of analog

Dem CXR Level 1 =Dmd Eb/No, output on rear panel alarm
2 =Mod CXR Level connector pins 5 and 6 on
connector J6 on the rear
panel.
Monitor Full Numeric +1.0V to +10.0 V Full scale setting for
+5.000V maximum output voltage
Monitor Output Slope Numeric 0 = Positive, Setting the slope of the
Positive 1 = Negative Monitor output to be +X and
+Y or +X and -Y.
Monitor Input Threshold Numeric 0.5V to 49.5V in 0.1V steps Sets the trigger threshold for
+1.2 V the analog input signal on
pins 4 and 6 of the connector
J6 on the rear panel
Monitor Input Sense Selection 0 = Active Low, Sets the sense for the analog
Active High 1 = Active High input monitor trigger.

Event Reference Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log status of the reference
2 = Log & Send Alert oscillator alarm
Event IP Control Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the IP
Do Not Log 1 = Log Control Port status alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event OCXO Oven Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log OCXO Oven Mask alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert (M7LT only)
Event Monitor Input Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log status of the analog input
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.

3-38 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Event Power Supply Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set and
Log 2 = Log & Send Alert alert for the Power Supply
Mask alarm
Event System Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of “System” events.
2 = Log & Send Alert System events include:
Recalled or Stored
configuration, Firmware flash
updates, Buffer slips, DHCP
address acquired, etc.
Event HTTP Access Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the HTTP port
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event SNMP Access Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log status of the SNMP port
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Cold/Warm Start Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log a Cold
Do Not Log 1 = Log or Warm Start (power cycle or
2 = Log & Send Alert system reset).
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log status of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert
Log 2 = Log & Send Alert for the status of the Hardware
alarm

Alarm Event Pending Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to Selects destination and action
to Alarm A & B Alarm B, 3=to Alarm A & B, taken when an event of any
4 = Flash Online Only kind has been logged.
5 = Flash Minor Alm Only
Alarm Reference Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to Selects destination and action
to Alarm A & B Alarm B, 3=to Alarm A & B, taken for reference oscillator
4 = Mute CXR, 5 = Mute CXR alarm types.
& Alarm A, 6 = Mute CXR &
Alarm B, 7 = Mute CXR &
Alarm A & B
Alarm IP Control Port Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to Selects destination and action
to Alarm A & B Alarm B, 3=to Alarm A & B, taken for the IP Control Port
4 = Mute CXR, 5 = Mute CXR status
& Alarm A, 6 = Mute CXR &
Alarm B, 7 = Mute CXR &
Alarm A & B

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-39

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Alarm OCXO Oven Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to Selects destination of alarm.
Mute & Alarm A Alarm B, 3=to Alarm A & B, M7LT only
4 = Mute CXR, 5 = Mute CXR
& Alarm A, 6 = Mute CXR &
Alarm B, 7 = Mute CXR &
Alarm A & B
Alarm Monitor Input Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to Selects destination and action
None Alarm B, 3=to Alarm A & B, taken for the analog input
4 = Mute CXR, 5 = Mute CXR alarm.
& Alarm A, 6 = Mute CXR &
Alarm B, 7 = Mute CXR &
Alarm A & B
Alarm Power Supply Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to Selects destination and action
to Alarm A & B Alarm B, 3=to Alarm A & B, taken for the input power DC
4 = Mute CXR, 5 = Mute CXR voltage threshold alarm.
& Alarm A, 6 = Mute CXR &
Alarm B, 7 = Mute CXR &
Alarm A & B
Alarm Power Supply Min Numeric +7.6V to +34.0V in 0.1V steps Threshold setting for the input
+8.0 V power DC voltage alarm.
Alarm Beep Mask Selection 0=None, 1=On Alarm A, Selects if alarm causes a unit
On Alarm A & B 2=On Alarm B, audible “beep”.
3=On Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B

Test Modem Selection 0 = Disabled, Carrier output mode for test

Disabled 1 = Lamp Test purposes.
Test Firmware Flash 1 Read Only N/A Read only indication of the
2.30i1 - Running current operating Firmware
Test Firmware Flash 2 Read Only N/A Read only indication of the
2.30i1 pending or recently updated
firmware.
Test Installer Read Only Idle, Downloading, Verifying, Read only indication of the
Idle Installing, current state of the firmware
installer
Test Power Supply Read Only N/A Real time input power DC
+24.2 V voltage monitor
Test Monitor Input Read Only N/A Real time analog input voltage
+24.2 V monitor on pin 4 of J6
Test OCXO Temperature Read Only N/A Real time OCXO temperature
+90.0°C monitor. M7LT only

3-40 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Unit Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Test Admin Selection 0 = Normal, Normal function is meant for
Normal 1 = Enable the typical earth station
operator. Enabling the Test
Admin function is reserved for
depot maintenance.

Feature Unit Read Only N/A Shows the option capability of

None the modem
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature
00000000000000000000 code to activate new features.

Table 3-6 - Modulator Parameter Detail

Modulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status Carrier Read Only Read Only Modulator Carrier Status
Sending, OK
Status BUC Read Only Read Only External BUC Status.
Normal M7LT only
Status Interface Read Only Read Only Transmit Interface Status
Normal
Status Test Read Only Read Only Modulator Test Status
Normal
Status BUC Power Option Read Only Read Only Installed Internal BUC Power
+48v @ 3.13A Supply (M7LT only)
Status HW Type Read Only Read Only Identification of installed
Std IF Modulator Modulator hardware
Status HW ID Read Only Read Only Part number of installed
M709002A-1r1.00 Modulator hardware
Status HW S/N Read Only Read Only Serial number of installed
100032 Modulator hardware

IF BUC Xmt Frequency Numeric Can change depending on RF carrier center frequency
14132.000MHz the setting of the BUC LO based on the BUC LO
Frequency parameter setting
IF Frequency Numeric 50.000000 to 180.000000 Transmit carrier center
70.000000MHz MHz frequency
950.000000 to 2150.000000
MHz for L-Band unit
IF BUC Xmt Level Numeric Can change depending on Transmit output power level
+10dBW the setting of the BUC Xmt display based on the BUC Xmt
Gain Gain parameter setting
IF Level Numeric +5.0 to –35.0 dBm Transmit output power level
–3.82dBm +3.0 max at 50Ω
IF Output Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable Transmit carrier output enable
Enabled

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-41

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Modulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
IF Modulation Selection 0 = BPSK, 1 = QPSK, Modulation Mode. Some values
QPSK 2 = OQPSK, 3 = 8PSK, left available for new options.
4 = 8QAM, 6 = 16QAM
IF Spectrum Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Modulation Spectrum control
Normal
IF Filter Roll-Off Selection 0=0.40, 1=0.35, 2=0.30, Sets the Alpha roll-off factor for
0.35 3=0.25, 4=0.20, 5=0.15, the modulator filters
6=0.10, 7=0.08, 8=0.05
IF AUPC Mode Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable, Automatic Uplink Power Control.
Disabled
»IF AUPC Eb/No Numeric 3.0 to 20.0 dB AUPC remote receive Eb/No
8.0dB level set point.
»IF AUPC Max Level Numeric +5.0 dBm to Minimum level Max. Transmit level under AUPC
–5.0 dB control
»IF AUPC Min Level Numeric Maximum level to –35 dBm Min. Transmit Level under AUPC
–14.0 dB control
IF Mute Selection 0 = Automatic, Manual requires manual Carrier
Automatic 1 = Confirm, enable after Mod output change.
2 = Manual Option 3 forces Cxr off after
3 = Manual & Power Loss power fail.
IF Impedance Selection 0 = 50, 1 = 75 Transmit IF impedance.
75 Ohm

Data Bit Rate Numeric 1.2 kbps to 59.04 Mbps in 1 Modulator Bit Rate – The max
4.096000Mbps bps resolution. Entered in and min are determined by
kbps but display will change settings and options.
to Mbps if the rate is
1000.000 kbps or higher.
Data Symbol Rate Numeric 2.4 ksps to 14.76Msps in Modulator Symbol Rate – The
2.730667Msps 1sps resolution. Entered in max and min are determined by
ksps but display will change settings and options.
to Msps if the rate is
1000.000 ksps or higher.
Data Rate Entry Mode Selection 0 = Bit Rate, Determines which parameter is
Bit Rate 1 = Symbol Rate used to enter the modulator rate
Data Send Interface Selection 0 = Disabled, Sets the active interface for the
Disabled 1 = Installed Interface Option data input to the modulator.
in Slot 3
2 = Installed Interface Option
in Slot 4
Data FEC Mode Selection 0 = None Reed-Solomon is enabled below.
Viterbi 1 = Viterbi, Please note that available FEC
2 = TCM, options are determined by other
3 = TPC modem settings.
4 = TPC
5 = LDPC
Data FEC Option Selection 0 = Normal, (Vit) Sets the bit compatibility of
Swap C0/C1 1 = Swap C0/C1, the Viterbi FEC encoder.

3-42 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Modulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Data FEC Code Rate Selection 0 = 1/2, 1 = 3/4, 2 = 5/6 (Vit) Sets the code rate of the
3/4 3 = 7/8. Viterbi FEC encoder.
0 = 2/3 in 8PSK TCM
Data RS Mode Selection 0 = Disabled, (Vit + R-S) Reed-Solomon
IESS-309 1 = IESS-308 column and options only
2 = IESS-309 available if enabled. Entry is not
3 = CT 200-220 shown when TPC enabled.
5 = Custom
»Data RS (n) Numeric In Custom Mode only: (Vit + R-S) Block size
219 Available n values n = 22 to 255
Read only in other modes
»Data RS (k) Numeric In Custom Mode only: (Vit + R-S) k = 20 to 253,
201 Available k values k must be 2 to 20 less than n
Read only in other modes
»Data RS Depth Selection In Custom Mode only: (Vit + R-S) Interleave depth
4 0 = 4, 1 = 8, 2 = 16 factor
Read only in other modes
Data Dif Encoder Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable (Vit + R-S) Differential Encoder
Enabled Not shown or settable except in
special modes.
Data Scrambler Selection 0 = Disable, (Vit + R-S) Scrambler types.
Auto 1 = Auto Types are added if optional
2 = V.35, hardware is installed. The Auto
3 = Intelsat, mode uses IESS standards to
4 = EFD, automatically switch to use
5 = Alt V.35 synchronous scramblers part of
6 = Alt Intelsat R-S and TPC.
7 = Alt RS EFD** ** only when R-S = Enabled
8 = RS Sync**
Data FEC Option Selection 0 = Advanced, (TPC) Sets the compatibility
Advanced 1 = CT, mode for the TPC FEC encoder
Data FEC Code Rate Selection 0 = 0.452-16k, (TPC) Sets the code rate of the
3/4-4k 1 = 1/2-16k, 2 = 1/2-4k TPC FEC encoder.
3 = 3/4-16k, 4 = 3/4-4k
5 = 7/8-16k, 6 = 7/8-4k
7 = 0.922-16k,
8 = 0.950-4k
Data Scrambler Selection 0 = Disable, (TPC) Scrambler types. Types
Auto 1 = Auto are added or removed
2 = V.35, depending on the selected FEC
3 = Intelsat, mode. The Auto mode uses
4 = EFD, IESS standards to automatically
5 = Alt V.35 switch to use synchronous
6 = Alt Intelsat scramblers part of R-S and TPC.
7 = FEC Sync
8 = FEC Sync

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-43

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Modulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Data FEC Option Selection 0 = 256 Block, (LDPC) Sets the LDPC FEC
4k Block 1 = 512 Block, encoder block size
2 = 1k Block,
3 = 2k Block,
4 = 4k Block,
5 = 8k Block,
6 = 16k Block,
Data FEC Code Rate Selection 0 = 1/2, 1 = 2/3, (LDPC) Sets the code rate of the
3/4 2 = 3/4, 3 = 14/17, LDPC FEC encoder.
4 = 7/8, 5 = 10/11,
6 = 16/17
Data Scrambler Selection 0 = Disable, (LDPC) Scrambler types. Types
Auto 1 = Auto are added or removed
2 = V.35, depending on the selected FEC
3 = Intelsat, mode. The Auto mode uses
4 = EFD, IESS standards to automatically
5 = Alt V.35 switch to use synchronous
6 = Alt Intelsat scramblers part of R-S and TPC.
7 = FEC Sync
8 = FEC Sync

BUC Power Selection 0 = Disabled Selects Power and Voltage to a

Enabled 1 = Enabled BUC in the M7LT
BUC Voltage Out Numeric Read Only Displays Voltage Output on
+23.2 V Transmit Cable in the M7LT
BUC Current Numeric Read Only Displays Current draw of BUC in
+3.42 A the M7LT
BUC 10 MHz Ref Selection 0 = Disabled Selects if modem’s current 10
Enabled 1 = Enable MHz reference to be supplied to
a BUC in M7L/LT
BUC LO Frequency Numeric 0 to 49999.999996 MHz Selects BUC LO frequency in
13050.000000MHz M7L/LT. If set non-zero then IF
frequency setting is at RF
frequency.
BUC Xmt Spectrum Selection 0 = Non-Inverted Sets the compatibility of the
Non-Inverted 1 = Inverted spectrum dependent on inverting
or non-inverting BUCs in
M7L/LT. Low side LO provides a
non-inverted spectrum.
BUC Xmt Gain Numeric 0.00 to 99.99 dB Sets the gain of the BUC in the
Disabled M7L/LT
BUC Xmt Level Max Numeric 0.00 to +30dBW Sets the ?? in the M7LT
+30 dBW
BUC FSK Remote M&C Selection Future Option
(Future Option)
BUC Remote Parameter 1 Numeric Future Option
(Future Option)
BUC Remote Parameter 2 Numeric Future Option
(Future Option)

3-44 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Modulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
BUC Remote Parameter 3 Numeric Future Option
(Future Option)

Event Carrier Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Carrier
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.
Event AUPC Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the AUPC
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.
Event BUC Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the BUC
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.
Event BUC FSK Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the BUC FSK
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert
Log 2 = Log & Send Alert for the status of the Hardware
alarm

Alarm Carrier Mask Selection 0-4= Mute CXR, Selects destination of alarm
Mute & Alarm A 5 = Mute CXR & Alarm A,
6 = Mute CXR & Alarm B,
7 = Mute CXR & Alarm A & B
Alarm AUPC Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
To Alarm B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
To Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0-4= Mute CXR, Selects destination of alarm
Mute & Alarm A 5 = Mute CXR & Alarm A,
6 = Mute CXR & Alarm B,
7 = Mute CXR & Alarm A & B
Alarm BUC Power Mask Selection 0=None, 1=A, 2=B, 3=A&B, Selects destination of alarm in
to Alarm A 4 = Mute CXR, the M7LT.
5 = Mute CXR & Alarm A,
6 = Mute CXR & Alarm B,
7 = Mute CXR & Alarm A & B
Alarm BUC Voltage Min Numeric
+20.0 V

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-45

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Modulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Alarm BUC Current Max Numeric
+5.00 A
Alarm BUC Current Min Numeric
+2.50 A
Alarm BUC FSK Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, 2=to (Future Option) Selects
(Future Option) Alarm B, destination of alarm in the M7LT.
3=to Alarm A & B

Test Modulation Selection 0 = Normal, Carrier output mode for test

Normal 1 = Pure CXR, purposes.
2 = Alt 1/0
3 = Lower Sideband,
4 = Upper Sideband
Test Total Occupied BW Read Only N/A Displays modulated carrier
3.413333 MHz Occupied BW. This value will be
determined by the IF Filter Roll-
Off parameter setting.

Feature Bit Rate Limit Read Only N/A Shows the Bit Rate capability of
5.000000 Mbps the modem
Feature Modulation Read Only N/A Shows the modulation capability
B/Q/OQ/8/PSK 8/16QAM of the modem
Feature FEC Read Only N/A Shows the FEC capability of the
Vit TCM RS L16k T16k modem
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

Table 3-7 - Demodulator Parameter Detail

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status Carrier Read N/A Demodulator receive Carrier
Locked, Ok Only Status
Status Eb/No Read N/A Measured Eb/No
7.32 dB Only
Status Offset Read N/A Receive carrier offset frequency.
–1.384 kHz Only
Status Level Read N/A Receive carrier level
–56.71 dBm Only
Status LNB Read N/A LNB Status. M7LT
Normal Only
Status Interface Read N/A Demodulator Interface Status
Normal Only
Status Test Read N/A Demodulator Test Status
Normal Only
Status FEC Hardware Opt Read N/A Identification of installed FEC
None Only optional hardware.

3-46 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status LNB Power Option Read N/A LNB Power Supply Status.
+13V, +18V @ 0.050A Only M7L and M7LT
Status Hardware Type Read N/A Identification of installed
Std IF Demodulator Only Demodulator hardware
Status Hardware ID Read N/A Part number of installed
M709004A-1r1.00 Only Demodulator hardware
Status Hardware S/N Read N/A Serial number of installed
101820 Only Demodulator hardware

IF LNB Rcv Frequency Numeric Can change depending on RF carrier center frequency
10750.000MHz the setting of the LNB LO based on the LNB LO Frequency
parameter setting
IF Frequency Numeric 50.000000 to 180.000000 Receive carrier center frequency.
70.000000MHz MHz L-Band frequency shown if LNB
950.000000 to LO is set to 0, else is set to RF
2150.000000 MHz for L- frequency.
Band unit
IF Sweep Range Numeric 0.100 to 3500.000 kHz Receive carrier acquisition range
30.000kHz in kHz.
IF Sweep Mode Selection 0 = Fast, 1 = Search Fast acquisition mode is
Fast standard method. Search
acquisition parameters are set in
the Sweep Time menu
»IF Sweep Time Numeric 0.0 to 99.9 Seconds. Narrow Sweep time applicable to
10.0 Sec 0 Disables Narrow Sweep Search sweep mode only.
IF Modulation Selection 0 = BPSK, 1 = QPSK, Modulation Mode. Some values
QPSK 2 = OQPSK, 3 = 8PSK, left available for new options.
4 = 8QAM, 5&6 = 16QAM
IF Spectrum Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Demodulation Spectrum control
Normal
IF Filter Roll-Off Selection 0=0.40, 1=0.35, 2=0.30, Sets the Alpha roll-off factor for
0.35 3=0.25, 4=0.20, 5=0.15, the demodulator filters
6=0.10, 7=0.08
IF AUPC Remote Path Selection 0 = Disable, Sets the output path for the
Disable 1 = Local, AUPC data. “Out MCC Port”
2 = Out MCC Port, setting at both ends of a duplex
3 = Out IP Control Port PtP link is the standard for bi-
directional AUPC on a duplex
link. “Local” is the setting for
AUPC of the transmit carrier in a
broadcast network.
IF AUPC Remote MCC Address Numeric 1 to 254. 255 = Global Set the address of the target
1 MCC port
IF Impedance Selection 0 = 50, 1 = 75 Receive IF impedance.
75 Ohm

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-47

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Data Bit Rate Numeric 1.2 kbps to 59.04 Mbps in Demodulator Bit Rate – The max
4.096000 Mbps 1 bps resolution. Entered in and min are determined by
kbps but display will settings and options.
change to Mbps if the rate
is 1000.000 kbps or higher.
Data Symbol Rate Numeric 2.4 ksps to 14.76Msps in Demodulator Symbol Rate – The
2.730677 Msps 1sps resolution. Entered in max and min are determined by
ksps but display will settings and options.
change to Msps if the rate
is 1000.000 ksps or higher.
Data Rate Entry Mode Selection 0 = Bit Rate, Determines which parameter is
Bit Rate 1 = Symbol Rate used to enter the demodulator
rate
Data Rcv Interface Selection 0 = Disabled, Sets the active interface for the
Disabled 1 = Installed Interface data output from the
Option in Slot 3 demodulator.
2 = Installed Interface
Option in Slot 4
Data FEC Mode Selection 0 = None Reed-Solomon is enabled below.
Viterbi 1 = Viterbi, Please note that available FEC
2 = TCM, options are determined by
3 = N/A installed options and other
4 = TPC modem settings
5 = LDPC
Data FEC Option Selection 0 = Normal, (Vit) Sets the bit compatibility of
Normal 1 = Swap C0/C1, the Viterbi FEC decoder.
Data FEC Code Rate Selection 0 = 1/2, 1 = 3/4, 2 = 5/6 (Vit) Sets the code rate of the
3/4 3 = 7/8. Viterbi FEC decoder.
0 = 2/3 in 8PSK TCM
Date RS Mode Selection 0 = Disabled, (Vit + R-S) Reed-Solomon
IESS-309 1 = IESS-308 column and options only
2 = IESS-309 available if enabled. Entry is not
3&4 = CT 200-220 shown when TPC enabled.
5 = Custom
»Data RS (n) Numeric In Custom Mode only: (Vit + R-S) Block size
219 Available n values n = 22 to 255. Entry is not shown
Read only in other modes when TPC enabled.
»Data RS (k) Numeric In Custom Mode only: (Vit + R-S) k = 20 to 253,
201 Available k values k must be 2 to 20 less than n.
Read only in other modes Entry is not shown when TPC
enabled.
»Data RS Depth Selection In Custom Mode only: (Vit + R-S) Interleave depth
4 0 = 4, 1 = 8, 2 = 16 factor. Entry is not shown when
Read only in other modes TPC enabled.
Data Dif Decoder Not 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable (Vit + R-S) Differential Encoder
Enabled Shown Not shown or settable except in
special modes.

3-48 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Data Descrambler Selection 0 = Disable, (Vit + R-S) Descrambler types.
Auto 1 = Auto Types are added if optional
2 = V.35, hardware is installed. The Auto
3 = Intelsat, mode uses IESS standards to
4 = EFD, automatically switch to use
5 = Alt V.35 synchronous scramblers part of
6 = Alt Intelsat R-S and TPC.
7 = Alt RS EFD** ** only when R-S = Enabled
8 = RS Sync**
Data FEC Option Selection 0 = Advanced, (TPC) Sets the compatibility
Advanced 1 = CT, mode for the TPC FEC decoder
Data FEC Code Rate Selection 0 = 0.452-16k, (TPC) Sets the code rate of the
3/4-4k 1 = 1/2-16k, 2 = 1/2-4k TPC FEC decoder.
3 = 3/4-16k, 4 = 3/4-4k
5 = 7/8-16k, 6 = 7/8-4k
7 = 0.922-16k,
8 = 0.950-4k
Data Descrambler Selection 0 = Disable, (TPC) Descrambler types. Types
Auto 1 = Auto are added or removed
2 = V.35, depending on the selected FEC
3 = Intelsat, mode. The Auto mode uses
4 = EFD, IESS standards to automatically
5 = Alt V.35 switch to use synchronous
6 = Alt Intelsat descramblers part of R-S and
7 = FEC Sync TPC.
8 = FEC Sync
Data FEC Option Selection 0 = 256 Block, (LDPC) Sets the LDPC FEC
4k Block 1 = 512 Block, decoder block size
2 = 1k Block,
3 = 2k Block,
4 = 4k Block,
5 = 8k Block,
6 = 16k Block,
Data FEC Code Rate Selection 0 = 1/2, 1 = 2/3, (LDPC) Sets the code rate of the
3/4 2 = 3/4, 3 = 14/17, LDPC FEC decoder.
4 = 7/8, 5 = 10/11,
6 = 16/17
Data Descrambler Selection 0 = Disable, (LDPC) Scrambler types. Types
Auto 1 = Auto are added or removed
2 = V.35, depending on the selected FEC
3 = Intelsat, mode. The Auto mode uses
4 = EFD, IESS standards to automatically
5 = Alt V.35 switch to use synchronous
6 = Alt Intelsat scramblers part of R-S and TPC.
7 = FEC Sync
8 = FEC Sync
Data FEC Hold Numeric 0 to 255 Number of FEC lock “cycles” the
1 Normally set to 1 FEC will accomplish before
declaring loss of lock.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-49

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
LNB Power Selection 0 = Disabled Selects Power and Voltage to an
+18 V 1 = +13VDC LNB in the M7LT
2 = +18VDC
LNB Voltage Monitor Read N/A Monitors the Voltage to the LNB
+17.4 V Only in the M7LT
LNB Current Out Numeric Read Only Displays Current draw of LNB
221 mA when LNB Power is active in the
M7LT
LNB 10 MHz Ref Selection 0 = Disabled Selects if modem’s current 10
Enabled 1 = Enable MHz reference to be supplied to
an LNB in the M7LT
LNB LO Frequency Numeric 0 to 49999.999996 MHz Selects LNB LO frequency in the
5150.000000 MHz M7L/LT. If set non-zero then IF
frequency setting is at RF
frequency.
LNB Rcv Spectrum Selection 0 = Non-Inverted Sets the compatibility of the
Inverted 1 = Inverted spectrum dependent on inverting
or non-inverting LNBs in the
M7LT. Low side LO provides a
non-inverted spectrum

Event Carrier Lock Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Carrier
2 = Log & Send Alert Lock alarm.
Event Eb/No Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Eb/No
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.
Event Level Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Level
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm.
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log activity of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert
Do Not Log 2 = Log & Send Alert for the status of the Hardware
alarm

3-50 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Alarm Carrier Lock Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B,
4 = Mute CXR,
5 = Mute CXR & Alarm A,
6 = Mute CXR & Alarm B,
7 = Mute CXR & Alarm A &
B
Alarm Low Eb/No Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Low Eb/No Limit Numeric 0.50 to 19.99 dB Sets the Eb/No threshold that will
5.00 dB raise an alarm.
Alarm Low Level Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Low Level Limit Numeric -91.19 to -8.30 dBm Sets the Rcv Level threshold that
-55.00 dBm will raise an alarm. Range is
variable based on the symbol
rate of the Rcv carrier.
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
To Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
»Alarm LNB Power Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm –
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B, Only shown in M7LT
3 = to Alarm A & B
»Alarm LNB Current Max 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm –
300 mA 2 = to Alarm B, Only shown in M7LT
3 = to Alarm A & B
»Alarm LNB Current Min 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm –
150 mA 2 = to Alarm B, Only shown in M7LT
3 = to Alarm A & B

Test IF Loopback Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable IF Loop-back control.

Disabled
Test Total Occupied BW Read N/A Displays modulated carrier
3.413333 MHz Only Occupied BW. This value will be
determined by the IF Filter Roll-
Off parameter setting.

Feature Bit Rate Limit Read Shows the Bit Rate capability of
5.000000 Mbps Only the modem
Feature Modulation Read Shows the modulation capability
B/Q/OQ/8/PSK 8/16QAM Only of the modem

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-51

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Demodulator Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Feature FEC Read Shows the FEC capability of the
Vit TCM RS L16k T16k Only modem
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

Table 3-8 – Synchronous Interface Parameter Detail

Synchronous Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status I/O Read Only N/A Interface Status
Online
Status I/O Send Clock Read Only N/A
Locked, Ok
Status I/O Send Data Read Only N/A
Active, Ok
Status I/O Rcv Buffer Read Only Press “1” then "Enter" to Only shows if the Rcv Buffer is
100%, 0 Slips re-center the buffer. active. 100% is buffer center.
Press “0” then "Enter" to
clear the “Slip Status”.
Status I/O Rcv Data Read Only N/A
Active, Ok
Status I/O Signaling Read Only N/A Synchronous Interface signaling
rts CTS DCD dtr DSR status. Lower case indicates not-
active status, upper case
indicates active status
Status ESC Signaling Read Only N/A Engineering service channel
rts CTS DCD dtr DSR interface signaling status. Lower
case indicates not-active status,
upper case indicates active
status. Only shown when the
ESC channel is active.
Status Test Read Only N/A Interface Test status
BER Active
Status Hardware Type Read Only N/A Indicates the type of the active
Multi-Sync Interface interface
Status Hardware ID Read Only N/A Indicates the part number of the
M709013A-1r1.00 active interface
Status Hardware S/N Read Only N/A Indicates the serial number of the
101678 active interface

I/O Mode Selection 0 = Disable Interface electrical mode.

RS-449 1 = RS-232
2 = RS-449
3 = RS-449/Unterm
4 = V.35
5 = X.21
6 = EIA-530
7 = EIA-530A

3-52 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Synchronous Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
I/O Send Clock Source Selection 0 = Internal, 1 = TT Clock Transmit Clock Source.
TT Clock 2 = Rcv Clock,
3 = External
I/O Send Data Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Transmit Data Inversion
Normal
I/O Rcv Clock Source Selection 0 = Dmd Rcv Clock, Receive Clock Source.
Dmd Rcv Clock 1 = Internal, ‘Dmd Rcv Clock’ selection
2 = Mod Clock, disables the buffer.
3 = TT Clock,
4 = External
I/O Rcv Buffer Delay Numeric 0.0001 to 999.9999 ms Sets the size of the Rcv Buffer in
2.0000 ms mSec. Range is dependent on
the data rate of the Rcv carrier.
I/O Rcv Buffer Size Read Only N/A Indicates the size of the Rcv
8192 bits Buffer in bits.
I/O Rcv Clock Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Receive Clock Inversion
Normal
I/O Rcv Data Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Receive Data Inversion
Normal
I/O RTS Selection 0 = Normal Interface RTS line control
Normal 1 = Control CXR
I/O CTS Selection 0 = Normal, Interface CTS line control
Normal 1 = Force Active
I/O DCD Selection 0 = Normal, Interface DCD line control
Normal 1 = Force Active
I/O DTR Selection 0 = Normal, Interface DTR line control
Ignore 1 = Ignore
I/O DSR Selection 0 = Normal, Interface DSR line control
Force Active 1 = Force Active
I/O RTS Monitor Selection 0 = Disabled, Allows using Alarm relay contacts
to Alarm A 1 = to Alarm A, to show RTS Status, overriding
2 = to Alarm B other alarms.

Send Mux Mode Selection 0 = Disabled, Enables Multiplexer to specified

Advanced 1 = IBS Standard, mode. Enable makes other menu
2 = IBS Enhanced selection below visible.
3 = Advanced
Send Mux ESC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
2.400 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to ESC
kbps Communications
Send Mux MCC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
0.300 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to MCC
kbps Communications.
Send Mux Alarm Channel Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Enable the backward alarms
0.100 kbps

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-53

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Synchronous Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Send Mux Overhead Ratio Read Only N/A Shows current data to aggregate
3871:4096 ratio for mux.

Rcv Mux Mode Selection 0 = Disabled, Enables Demultiplexer to

Advanced 1 = IBS Standard, specified mode. Enable makes
2 = IBS Enhanced other menu selection below
3 = Advanced visible.
Rcv Mux ESC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
2.400 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to ESC
kbps Communications.
Rcv Mux MCC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
0.300 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to MCC
kbps Communications
Rcv Mux Alarm Overhead Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Enable the backward alarms
Enabled
Rcv Mux Overhead Ratio Read Only N/A Shows current data to aggregate
3871:4096 ratio for mux.

ESC Async Mode Selection 0= ESC port ???

Auto Overhead Rate
ESC Async Port Selection 0 = RS-232, Physical ESC port type.
RS-232 1 = RS-485 2 wire,
2 = RS-485 4 wire,
3 = RS-485 Drvr On
ESC Async Rate Selection 0 to 7 selects standard Physical ESC port rate at rear
9.600 kbps rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 panel.
kbps
ESC Async Format Selection 0 = N,7,1 Physical ESC port format at rear
N,8,1 1 = P,7,1 panel.
2 = N,8,1
3 = P,8,1
ESC Async CTS Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC CTS line control
Normal Active
ESC Async DCD Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC DCD line control
Normal Active
ESC Async DTR Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Ignore ESC DTR line control
Ignore
ESC Async DSR Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC DRS line control
Force Active Active

MCC Mode Selection 0 = Disable Sets the rights of the MCC

Full Access 1 = Read Only channel.
2 = Full Access
MCC Protocol Selection 0 = M7 Binary Packet
M7 Binary Packet

3-54 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Synchronous Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
MCC Send Address Numeric 1 to 254, 255 is a Sets the address of the Send
1 broadcast address MCC port
MCC Rcv Address Numeric 1 to 254, 255 is a Sets the address of the Rcv MCC
1 broadcast address port
MCC Activity Selection 0 = None Sets the notification when there
1 1 = Beep is MCC traffic detected.
2 = Blink Online Lamp
3 = Beep & Blink Online

Event Send Clock Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Send
2 = Log & Send Alert Clock activity alarm
Event Send Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Send
2 = Log & Send Alert Data activity alarm
Event Rcv Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Rcv Data
2 = Log & Send Alert activity alarm
Event Backward Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Backward
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event BER Loss Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the BER Loss
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event Buffer Slip Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Buffer
2 = Log & Send Alert Slip alarm
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert for
Do Not Log 2 = Log & Send Alert the status of the Hardware alarm

Alarm Send Clock Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Send Data Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-55

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Synchronous Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Alarm Send Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Tx interface. (0 =
Disable)
Alarm Rcv Data Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Rcv Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Rcv interface. (0
= Disable)
Alarm Backward Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm BER Loss Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A & B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B

Test Ter Loopback Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable Interface terrestrial loop-back

Disabled send input to receive output.
Test Sat Loopback Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable Interface satellite loop-back
Disabled receive output to send input.
Test BER I/O Selection 0 = Satellite, BERT Transmit output and
Satellite 1 = Terrestrial Receive input direction..
Test Send BER Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = 2047, BERT enable to modem transmit
Disabled 2 = 2^23-1 input.
3 = Insert 1 Error
(if enabled)
Test Rcv BER Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = 2047, BERT enable from modem
2^23-1 2 = 2^23-1 receive output.
Test BER Read Only Enter to restart test BER measurement of the active
5.253E-8 test if ‘‘Test Rcv BER’ is active
Test BER Sync Loss Read Only Enter to restart test Measurement of the number of
0 sync losses in the active test if
‘‘Test Rcv BER’ is active
Test BER Errors Read Only Enter to restart test Measurement of the number of
15 bit errors in the active test if ‘Test
Rcv BER’ is active
Test BER Bits Read Only Enter to restart test Total Bits in active test
2.853E9 measurement if ‘Test Rcv BER’ is
active

3-56 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Synchronous Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Test BER EFS Read Only Enter to restart test Error free seconds in the active
94.35% test measurement if ‘Test Rcv
BER’ is active
Test BER Erred Sec Read Only Enter to restart test Errored seconds in the active test
15 measurement if ‘Test Rcv BER’ is
active
Test BER Total Sec Read Only Enter to restart test Total seconds in the active test
8485 measurement if ‘Test Rcv BER’ is
active
Test Send Bit Offset Read Only N/A Monitor of the frequency offset of
0 PPM the incoming bit clock reference
to the internal modem reference
standard.
Test Rcv Bit Offset Read Only N/A Monitor of the frequency offset of
0 PPM the bit clock recovered from the
satellite, reference to the internal
modem reference standard.

Feature Options Read Only N/A

None
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

Table 3-9 – I7 - IP Interface Parameter Detail

I7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status IP Read Only N/A Interface Status
Online, OK
Status GbE Read Only N/A Interface Mode Status
Connected, 1 Gb
Status Ref Relay Read Only N/A Future Option
Locked, OK
Status Send Data Read Only N/A Send Data Activity Status
Active, Ok
Status Rcv Data Read Only N/A Rcv Data Activity Status
Active, Ok
Status Test Read Only N/A Interface Test status
Normal
Status Hardware I/O Opt Read Only N/A
Remote Ref Relay
Status Hardware IP Opt Read Only N/A
IP Accelerator
Status Hardware Type Read Only N/A Indicates the type of the active
I7 IP Interface interface
Status Hardware ID Read Only N/A Indicates the part number of the
M709018A-1r0 active interface

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-57

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

I7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status Hardware S/N Read Only N/A Indicates the serial number of the
1016001 active interface

IP Control Mode Selection 0 = Disable,

Full Access 1 = Read Only,
2 = Full Access
Send WAN Protocol Selection 0 = M7 HDLC
M7 HDLC 1 = M500 HDLC
IP DHCP Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
Enabled
IP Address Numeric IP v4 IP Address format
192.168.100.001
IP Network Mask Numeric IP v4 IP network mask
255.255.255.0 format
IP MAC Address Read Only N/A
00:80:A8:00:25:6C
IP Q7 Reset Control Selection 0 = Watchdog, Selects the reset control of the I7
Watchdog 1 = Manual, Controller.
2 = Force Reboot Now
IP Q7 ID Read Only N/A I7 Controller Model Number
PQ7-M101G-R10-2
IP Q7 Software Ver Read Only N/A I7 Controller software type and
Vyatta-3.03 version

Stats Send Data PPS Read Only

0.015 kpps
Stats Send Data Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
3.125E3 to reset the counter
Stats Send Data Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
2.000E5 to reset the counter
Stats Send Data Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
12.66% to reset the counter
Stats Send MCC Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
0 to reset the counter
Stats Send MCC Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
0 to reset the counter
Stats Send MCC Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
0.00% to reset the counter
Stats Send Idle Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
2.156E4 to reset the counter
Stats Send Idle Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
1.380E6 to reset the counter
Stats Send Idle Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
87.33% to reset the counter
Stats Send Total Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
2.468E4 to reset the counter

3-58 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

I7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Stats Send Total Dropped Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" (Future Option) Indicated the
1.282E3 to reset the counter total number of packets dropped
for all data types
Stats Send Total PDR Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" (Future Option) Indicated the
1.641E-5 to reset the counter total packet dropped rate for all
data types.
Stats Send Total Sec. Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
208 to reset the counter

Stats Rcv Data PPS Read Only

0.015 kpps
Stats Rcv Data Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
3.125E3 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Data Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
2.000E5 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Data Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
12.66% to reset the counter
Stats Rcv MCC Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
0 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv MCC Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
0 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv MCC Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
0.00% to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Idle Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
2.156E4 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Idle Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
1.380E6 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Idle Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
87.33% to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Total Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
2.468E4 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Total Erred Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
10 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Total PER Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
4.051E-7 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Total Sec. Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter"
208 to reset the counter

MCC Mode Selection 0 = Disable Sets the rights of the MCC

Full Access 1 = Read Only channel.
2 = Full Access
MCC Protocol Selection 0 = M7 Binary Packet
M7 Binary Packet
MCC Send Rate Limit Numeric Entered in kbps up to the Sets the maximum rate of the
10.0 kbps maximum rate of the MCC channel
satellite data rate.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-59

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

I7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
MCC Send Address Numeric 1 to 254, 255 is a Sets the address of the Send
1 broadcast address MCC port
MCC Rcv Address Numeric 1 to 254, 255 is a Sets the address of the Rcv MCC
1 broadcast address port
MCC Activity Selection 0 = None Sets the notification when there
1 1 = Beep is MCC traffic detected.
2 = Blink Online Lamp
3 = Beep & Blink Online

Ref Relay Mode Selection Future Option

Output
Ref Relay Frequency Numeric Future Option
2.048 MHz

Event IP Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the

Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the IP alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Send Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Send
2 = Log & Send Alert Data alarm
Event Rcv Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Rcv Data
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event Ref Relay Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log (Future Option) Selects whether
Do Not Log 1 = Log to log the change in status of the
2 = Log & Send Alert Ref Relay alarm
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert
Do Not Log 2 = Log & Send Alert for the status of the Hardware
alarm

Alarm IP Mask Selection 0=None, 1=A, 2=B,

Mute & Alarm A & B 3=A&B, 4 = Mute CXR,
5 = Mute CXR & Alarm A,
6 = Mute CXR & Alarm B,
7 = Mute CXR & Alarm A
&B
Alarm Send User Data Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B

3-60 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

I7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Alarm Send Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 Sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Tx interface. (0 =
Disable)
Alarm Rcv Data Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Rcv Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 Sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Rcv interface. (0
= Disable)
Alarm Backward Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Ref Relay Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, (Future Option) Selects
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B, destination of alarm
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B

Test Sat WAN Loopback Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Interface satellite loop-back
Disabled receive output to send input
Test Ter WAN Loopback Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Interface terrestrial loop-back
Disabled send input to receive output.
Test Ter HDLC Loopback Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Interface terrestrial loop-back
Disabled send input to receive output.

Feature PPS Limit IP Packet per Second limitation

10.000 kPPS setting.
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

Table 3-10 – E7- Express Ethernet Interface Parameter Detail

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status I/O Read Only N/A Interface Status
Online, OK
Status Port 1 Read Only N/A Port 1 Status
Connected, 1 Gb
Status Port 2 Read Only N/A Port 2 Status
Connected, 100 Mb Fdx

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-61

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status Port 3 Read Only N/A Port 3 Status
UNCONNECTED
Status Port 4 Read Only N/A Port 4 Status
Disabled
Status Port 5 Read Only N/A SFP Port 5 Status
Not Installed
Status Send Buffer Read Only N/A Input Ethernet Buffer Status
0 ms Data Backlog
Status Send Data Read Only N/A Send Data Activity Status
Active, Ok
Status Rcv Data Read Only N/A Rcv Data Activity Status
Active, Ok
Status Ref Relay Read Only N/A Future Option
Locked OK
Status Test Read Only N/A Interface Test status
Normal
Status Hardware Type Read Only N/A Indicates the type of the active
E7 Express Interface interface
Status Hardware Ver Read Only N/A Indicates the part number of the
M709017A-1r9.91 active interface
Status Hardware S/N Read Only N/A Indicates the serial number of the
100360 active interface

I/O Port 1 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Sets the mode of the Ethernet
Data I/O 1 = Data I/O Port
2 = Dmd Output I/O
3 = Dmd Input I/O
I/O Port 1 Connection Selection 0 = Auto, Sets the connection type of the
Auto 1 = 1000BASE-T Ethernet Port
2 = 100BASE-T Full
Duplex
3 = 100BASE-T Half
Duplex
4 = 10BASE-T Full Duplex
5 = 10BASE-T Half
Duplex
I/O Port 1 VLAN ID Numeric Valid ID: 1 to 4094, VLAN ID for Port 1
1 0 = Disabled,
4095 reserved
I/O Port 2 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Sets the mode of the Ethernet
Data I/O 1 = Data I/O Port
2 = Dmd Output I/O
3 = Dmd Input I/O

3-62 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
I/O Port 2 Connection Selection 0 = Auto, Sets the connection type of the
Auto 1 = 1000BASE-T Ethernet Port
2 = 100BASE-T Full
Duplex
3 = 100BASE-T Half
Duplex
4 = 10BASE-T Full Duplex
5 = 10BASE-T Half
Duplex
I/O Port 2 VLAN ID Numeric Valid ID: 1 to 4094, VLAN ID for Port 2
4094 0 = Disabled,
4095 reserved
I/O Port 3 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Sets the mode of the Ethernet
Data I/O 1 = Data I/O Port
2 = Dmd Output I/O
3 = Dmd Input I/O
I/O Port 3 Connection Selection 0 = Auto, Sets the connection type of the
Auto 1 = 1000BASE-T Ethernet Port
2 = 100BASE-T Full
Duplex
3 = 100BASE-T Half
Duplex
4 = 10BASE-T Full Duplex
5 = 10BASE-T Half
Duplex
I/O Port 3 VLAN ID Numeric Valid ID: 1 to 4094, VLAN ID for Port 3
Disabled 0 = Disabled,
4095 reserved
I/O Port 4 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Sets the mode of the Ethernet
Data I/O 1 = Data I/O Port
2 = Dmd Output I/O
3 = Dmd Input I/O
I/O Port 4 Connection Selection 0 = Auto, Sets the connection type of the
Auto 1 = 1000BASE-T Ethernet Port
2 = 100BASE-T Full
Duplex
3 = 100BASE-T Half
Duplex
4 = 10BASE-T Full Duplex
5 = 10BASE-T Half
Duplex
I/O Port 4 VLAN ID Numeric Valid ID: 1 to 4094, VLAN ID for Port 4
Disabled 0 = Disabled,
4095 reserved
I/O Port 5 Mode Selection 0 = Disable, Sets the mode of the Ethernet
Data I/O 1 = Data I/O Port
2 = Dmd Output I/O
3 = Dmd Input I/O

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-63

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
I/O Port 5 Connection Read Only 0 = Auto Sets the connection type of the
Auto Ethernet Port
I/O Port 5 VLAN ID Numeric Valid ID: 1 to 4094, VLAN ID for Port 5
Disabled 0 = Disabled,
4095 reserved

Send WAN Mode Selection 0 = Bridge PTP Sets the WAN network type
Bridge PTP 1 = Hub Bridge PTMP
2 = Remote Bridge PTMP
3 = Mesh Bridge
Send WAN Protocol Selection 0 = M7 HDLC Sets the protocol of the HDLC for
M7 HDLC 1 = M500 HDLC legacy support

Rcv WAN Mode Selection 0 = Bridge PTP Sets the WAN network type
Bridge PTP 1 = Hub Bridge PTMP
2 = Remote Bridge PTMP
3 = Mesh Bridge
Rcv WAN Protocol Selection 0 = M7 HDLC Sets the protocol of the HDLC for
M7 HDLC 1 = M500 HDLC legacy support

QOS Mode Selection 0 = WRED Sets the flow control mode

WRED 1 = Strict Priority
QOS WAN Drop None Numeric Set value in mSec Sets the time before an the WAN
< 50 ms buffer will initiate flow control
QOS WAN Drop All Numeric Set value in mSec Sets the time before a the WAN
> 2938 ms buffer will drop all packets that
overfills the buffer.

Stats Send Data PPS Read Only Indicates the Send rate of the
38.871 kpps Ethernet Data traffic
Stats Send Data Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Ethernet
7.812E7 to reset the counter packets sent
Stats Send Data Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Ethernet
9.374E9 to reset the counter Bytes sent
Stats Send Data Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the percentage of the
80.42% to reset the counter WAN link that is used by the
Ethernet port
Stats Send MCC Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of MCC
3.413E3 to reset the counter packets sent
Stats Send MCC Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of MCC
9.374E4 to reset the counter Bytes sent
Stats Send MCC Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the percentage of the
18.56% to reset the counter WAN link that is used by the
MCC port
Stats Send Idle Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Idle
3.413E3 to reset the counter packets sent

3-64 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Stats Send Idle Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Idle
9.374E3 to reset the counter Bytes sent
Stats Send Idle Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the percentage of the
1.71% to reset the counter WAN link that is used by the Idle
packets
Stats Send Total Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicated the total number of
7.812E7 to reset the counter packets send for all data types
Stats Send Total Sec. Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicated the number of seconds
9.934E3 to reset the counter since the status counter was
reset.

Stats Rcv Data PPS Read Only Indicates the Rcv rate of the
38.871 kpps Ethernet Data traffic
Stats Rcv Data Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Ethernet
7.812E7 to reset the counter packets received
Stats Rcv Data Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Ethernet
9.374E9 to reset the counter Bytes received
Stats Rcv Data Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the percentage of the
80.42% to reset the counter WAN link that is used by the
Ethernet port
Stats Rcv MCC Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of MCC
3.413E3 to reset the counter packets received
Stats Rcv MCC Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of MCC
9.374E4 to reset the counter Bytes received
Stats Rcv MCC Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the percentage of the
18.56% to reset the counter WAN link that is used by the
MCC port
Stats Rcv Idle Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Idle
3.413E3 to reset the counter packets received
Stats Rcv Idle Bytes Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of Idle
9.374E3 to reset the counter Bytes received
Stats Rcv Idle Usage Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the percentage of the
1.71% to reset the counter WAN link that is used by the Idle
packets
Stats Rcv Total Packets Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicated the total number of
7.812E7 to reset the counter packets received for all data
types
Stats Rcv Total Erred Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the number of errored
1.282E3 to reset the counter packets
Stats Rcv Total PER Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicates the packet error rate
1.641E-5 to reset the counter
Stats Rcv Total Sec. Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Indicated the number of seconds
4.551E4 to reset the counter since the status counter was
reset

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-65

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
MCC Mode Selection 0 = Disable Sets the rights of the MCC
Full Access 1 = Read Only channel.
2 = Full Access
MCC Protocol Selection 0 = M7 Binary Packet
M7 Binary Packet
MCC Send Rate Limit Numeric Entered in kbps up to the Sets the maximum rate of the
10.0 kbps maximum rate of the MCC channel
satellite data rate.
MCC Send Address Numeric 1 to 254, 255 is a Sets the address of the Send
1 broadcast address MCC port
MCC Rcv Address Numeric 1 to 254, 255 is a Sets the address of the Rcv MCC
1 broadcast address port
MCC Activity Selection 0 = None Sets the notification when there
1 1 = Beep is MCC traffic detected.
2 = Blink Online Lamp
3 = Beep & Blink Online

Ref Relay Mode Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Future Option

Output
Ref Relay Frequency Numeric Future Option
2.048 MHz

Event I/O Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the IO alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Send Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Send
2 = Log & Send Alert Data alarm
Event Rcv Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Rcv Data
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event Ref Relay Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log (Future Option) Selects whether
Do Not Log 1 = Log to log the change in status of the
2 = Log & Send Alert Ref Relay alarm
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert
Do Not Log 2 = Log & Send Alert for the status of the Hardware
alarm

3-66 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

E7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Alarm IO Mask Selection 0=None, 1=A, 2=B, Selects destination of alarm
Mute & Alarm A & B 3=A&B, 4 = Mute CXR,
5 = Mute CXR & Alarm A,
6 = Mute CXR & Alarm B,
7 = Mute CXR & Alarm A
&B
Alarm Send Data Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Send Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 Sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Tx interface. (0 =
Disable)
Alarm Rcv Data Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Rcv Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 Sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Rcv interface. (0
= Disable)
Alarm Ref Relay Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, (Future Option) Selects
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B, destination of alarm
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0=None, 1=to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2=to Alarm B,
3=to Alarm A & B

Test Sat WAN Loopback Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Interface satellite loop-back
Disabled receive output to send input
Test Ter WAN Loopback Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Interface terrestrial loop-back
Disabled send input to receive output.

Feature Options Read Only N/A

None
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

Table 3-11 – G7 – Dual G.703/E1 Interface Parameter Detail

G7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status I/O Read Only N/A Interface Status
Online, OK
Status I/O Port 1 Read Only N/A Port 1 Interface Status
Normal

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-67

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

G7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status I/O Port 2 Read Only N/A Port 2 Interface Status
Normal
Status I/O Port 1 Rcv Buffer Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Only shows if the Rcv Buffer is
100%, 0 Slips and Reset to re-center the buffer. active. 100% is buffer center.
Status I/O Port 2 Rcv Buffer Read Only Press “Edit” then "Enter" Only shows if the Rcv Buffer is
100%, 0 Slips and Reset to re-center the buffer. active. 100% is buffer center.
Status ESC Signaling Read Only N/A Interface ESC signaling status.
RTS CTS DCD DTR DSR Lower case indicates not-active
status, upper case indicates
active status. Only shown when
the ESC channel is active.
Status Test Read Only N/A Interface Test status
BER Active
Status Hardware Type Read Only N/A Indicates the type of the active
Dual G703 Interface interface
Status Hardware ID Read Only N/A Indicates the part number of the
M709014A-100r1.00 active interface
Status Hardware S/N Read Only N/A Indicates the serial number of the
100048 active interface

I/O Port 1 Mode Selection 0 = Disable Interface Port 1 electrical mode.

E1 Balanced 120 Ohm 1 = E1 Balanced 120
Ohm
2 = E1 Unbalanced 75
Ohm
I/O Port 1 Send Coding Selection 0 = AMI, 1 = HDB3 Sets the line coding of the Port 1
HDB3 E1 Send Data
I/O Port 1 Send Framing Selection 0 = Full E1 Sets the Framing of the Port 1 E1
Full E1 Send Data
I/O Port 1 Send Nx64 Numeric 64.000 to 2048.000 kbps Sets the Interface Port 1 Send
2048.000 kbps in 64 kbps steps. If Send data rate
Framing is set to Full E1,
2048.000 is the only
setting
I/O Port 1 Rcv Coding Selection 0 = AMI, 1 = HDB3 Sets the line coding of the Port 1
HDB3 E1 Rcv Data
I/O Port 1 Rcv Framing Selection 0 = Full E1 Sets the Framing of the Port 1 E1
Full E1 Rcv Data
I/O Port 1 Rcv Nx64 Numeric 64.000 to 2048.000 kbps Sets the Interface Port 1 Rcv
2048.000 kbps in 64 kbps steps. If Rcv data rate
Framing is set to Full E1,
2048.000 is the only
setting

3-68 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

G7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
I/O Port 1 Rcv Clock Source Selection 0 = Dmd Rcv Clock Sets the output clock for the Port
Send Port 1 Clock 1 = Internal 1 Rcv Buffer
2 = Send Port 1 Clock Any selection other than Dmd
3 = Send Port 2 Clock Rcv Clock makes other menu
selection below visible.
I/O Port 1 Rcv Buffer Delay Numeric 0.0001 to 999.9999 ms Sets the size of the Port 1 Rcv
2.0000 ms Buffer in mSec. Range is
dependent on the data rate of the
Rcv carrier.
I/O Port 1 Rcv Buffer Size Read Only N/A Indicates the size of the Port 1
8192 bits Rcv Buffer in bits.

I/O Port 2 Mode Selection 0 = Disable Interface Port 2 electrical mode.

E1 Balanced 120 Ohm 1 = E1 Balanced 120
Ohm
2 = E1 Unbalanced 75
Ohm
I/O Port 2 Send Coding Selection 0 = AMI, 1 = HDB3 Sets the line coding of the Port 2
HDB3 E1 Send Data
I/O Port 2 Send Framing Selection 0 = Full E1 Sets the Framing of the Port 2 E1
Full E1 Send Data
I/O Port 2 Send Nx64 Numeric 64.000 to 2048.000 kbps Sets the Interface Port 2 Send
2048.000 kbps in 64 kbps steps. If Send data rate
Framing is set to Full E1,
2048.000 is the only
setting
I/O Port 2 Rcv Coding Selection 0 = AMI, 1 = HDB3 Sets the line coding of the Port 2
HDB3 E1 Rcv Data
I/O Port 2 Rcv Framing Selection 0 = Full E1 Sets the Framing of the Port 2 E1
Full E1 Rcv Data
I/O Port 2 Rcv Nx64 Numeric 64.000 to 2048.000 kbps Sets the Interface Port 2 Rcv
2048.000 kbps in 64 kbps steps. If Rcv data rate
Framing is set to Full E1,
2048.000 is the only
setting
I/O Port 2 Rcv Clock Source Selection 0 = Dmd Rcv Clock Sets the output clock for the Port
Send Port 1 Clock 1 = Internal 2 Rcv Buffer
2 = Send Port 1 Clock Any selection other than Dmd
3 = Send Port 2 Clock Rcv Clock makes other menu
selection below visible
I/O Port 2 Rcv Buffer Delay Numeric 0.0001 to 999.9999 ms Sets the size of the Port 2 Rcv
2.0000 ms Buffer in mSec. Range is
dependent on the data rate of the
Rcv carrier
I/O Port 2 Rcv Buffer Size Read Only N/A Indicates the size of the Port 2
8192 bits Rcv Buffer in bits

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-69

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

G7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Send Mux Mode Selection 0 = Disabled Enables Multiplexer to specified
Advanced 1 = Advanced mode. Enable makes other menu
2 = IBS Custom selection below visible
Send Mux MCC Rate Numeric 0.000 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
0.300 kbps 0.300 to 29428.110 kbps Mode.
Selects framing resources
committed to (MCC) Modem
Control Communications
Send Mux Alarm Channel Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Enable the backward alarms
Disabled
Send Mux Overhead Ratio Read Only N/A Shows current data-to-aggregate
16379:16384 ratio for mux

Rcv Mux Mode Selection 0 = Disabled Enables Demultiplexer to

Advanced 1 = Advanced specified mode.
2 = IBS Custom Any selection other than
Disabled makes other menu
selection below visible
Rcv Mux MCC Rate Numeric 0.000 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
0.300 kbps 0.300 to 29428.110 kbps Mode.
Selects framing resources
committed to (MCC) Modem
Control Communications.
Rcv Mux Alarm Channel Selection 0 = Disabled Enable the backward alarms
Enabled 1 = Enabled
Rcv Mux Overhead Ratio Read Only N/A Shows current data-to-aggregate
16384:16379 ratio for mux

ESC Async Mode Selection 0 = Disable Activates the ESC Port on the
Auto Overhead Rate 1 = Auto Overhead Rate rear panel for Auto or Manual
2 = Manual Overhead baud rate
Rate Any selection other than
Disabled makes other menu
selection below visible
ESC Async Port Selection 0 = RS-232, Interface type of the ESC port on
RS-232 1 = RS-485 2 wire, the rear panel.
2 = RS-485 4 wire,
3 = RS-485 Drvr On
ESC Async Rate Numeric 0.300 – 1000.000 kbps Baud rate at the ESC port on the
9.600 kbps rear panel.
ESC Async Format Selection 0 = N,7,1, Format of the ESC port on the
N,8,1 1 = P,7,1 rear panel
2 = N,8,1
3 = P,8,1
ESC Async CTS Selection 0 = Normal ESC CTS line control
Normal 1 = Force Active
ESC Async DCD Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC DCD line control
Normal Active

3-70 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

G7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
ESC Async DTR Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Ignore ESC DTR line control
Ignore
ESC Async DSR Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC DRS line control
Force Active Active

MCC Mode Selection 0 = Disable Activates the Modem Control

Full Access 1 = Read Only Channel (MCC)
2 = Full Access Any selection other than
Disabled makes other menu
selection below visible
MCC Protocol Selection 0 = M7 Binary Packet Sets the Protocol of the MCC
M7 Binary Packet 1 = M500 AUPC Packet
MCC Send Address Numeric 0 to 255, 255 = Global Sets the Send Address of the
1 MCC
MCC Rcv Address Numeric 0 to 254 Sets the Rcv Address of the
1 MCC
MCC Activity Selection 0 = None Sets the front panel indication on
None 1 = Beep MCC activity.
2 = Blink Online Lamp
3 = Beep & Blink Online
Lamp

Event I/O Port 1 Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Port 1 I/O
2 = Log & Send Alert activity alarm
Event I/O Port 2 Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Port 2 I/O
2 = Log & Send Alert activity alarm
Event Backward Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Backward
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event BER Loss Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the BER Loss
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event Port 1 Buffer Slip Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Port 1
2 = Log & Send Alert Buffer Slip alarm
Event Port 2 Buffer Slip Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Port 2
2 = Log & Send Alert Buffer Slip alarm
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-71

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

G7 Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert
Do Not Log 2 = Log & Send Alert for the status of the Hardware
alarm

Alarm I/O Port 1 Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of Port 1
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B, alarm
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm I/O Port 2 Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of Port 2
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B, alarm
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Backward Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A & B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B

Feature Options Read Only N/A

None
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

Table 3-12 – High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) Parameter Detail

High Speed Serial Interface Parameters
Representation Type Entry Description
Status I/O Read Only N/A Interface Status
Online
Status Send Clock Read Only N/A
Locked, Ok
Status Send Data Read Only N/A
Active, Ok
Status Rcv Buffer Read Only Press “1” then "Enter" to Only shows if the Rcv Buffer is
100%, 0 Slips and Reset re-center the buffer. active. 100% is buffer center.
Press “0” then "Enter" to
clear the “Slip Status”.
Status Rcv Data Read Only N/A
Active, Ok
Status I/O Signaling Read Only N/A HSSI signaling status. Lower
ta CA case indicates not-active status,
upper case indicates active
status

3-72 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

High Speed Serial Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Status ESC Signaling Read Only N/A Engineering service channel
rts CTS DCD dtr DSR interface signaling status. Lower
case indicates not-active status,
upper case indicates active
status. Only shown when the
ESC channel is active.
Status Test Read Only N/A Interface Test status
BER Active
Status Hardware Type Read Only N/A Indicates the type of the active
HSSI Interface interface
Status Hardware ID Read Only N/A Indicates the part number of the
M709016A-1r1.02 active interface
Status Hardware S/N Read Only N/A Indicates the serial number of the
1016788 active interface

I/O Mode Selection 0 = Disable Interface electrical mode.

HSSI 1 = HSSI
I/O Send Clock Source Selection 0 = Internal, 1 = TT Clock Transmit Clock Source.
TT Clock 2 = Rcv Clock,
3 = External
I/O Send Data Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Transmit Data Inversion
Normal
I/O Rcv Clock Source Selection 0 = Dmd Rcv Clock, Receive Clock Source.
Dmd Rcv Clock 1 = Internal, ‘Dmd Rcv Clock’ selection
2 = Mod Clock, disables the buffer.
3 = TT Clock,
4 = External
I/O Rcv Buffer Delay Numeric 0.0001 to 999.9999 ms Sets the size of the Rcv Buffer in
2.0000 ms mSec. Range is dependent on
the data rate of the Rcv carrier.
I/O Rcv Buffer Size Read Only N/A Indicates the size of the Rcv
8192 bits Buffer in bits.
I/O Rcv Clock Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Receive Clock Inversion
Normal
I/O Rcv Data Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Inverted Receive Data Inversion
Normal
I/O TA Selection 0 = Normal Interface TA line control
Control CXR 1 = Control CXR
I/O CA Selection 0 = Normal, Interface CA line control
Normal 1 = Force Active

Send Mux Mode Selection 0 = Disabled, Enables Multiplexer to specified

Advanced 1 = IBS Standard, mode. Enable makes other menu
2 = IBS Enhanced selection below visible.
3 = Advanced

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-73

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

High Speed Serial Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Send Mux ESC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
2.400 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to ESC
kbps Communications
Send Mux MCC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
0.300 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to MCC
kbps Communications.
Send Mux Alarm Channel Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Enable the backward alarms
Enabled
Send Mux Overhead Ratio Read Only N/A Shows current data to aggregate
3871:4096 ratio for mux.

Rcv Mux Mode Selection 0 = Disabled, Enables Multiplexer to specified

Advanced 1 = IBS Standard, mode. Enable makes other menu
2 = IBS Enhanced selection below visible.
3 = Advanced
Rcv Mux ESC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
2.400 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to ESC
kbps Communications.
Rcv Mux MCC Rate Selection 0 = Disable Only in Custom or Advanced
0.300 kbps 1 to 7 selects standard Mode. Selects framing resources
rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 committed to MCC
kbps Communications
Rcv Mux Alarm Channel Selection 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Enable the backward alarms
Enabled
Rcv Mux Overhead Ratio Read Only N/A Shows current data to aggregate
3871:4096 ratio for mux.

ESC Async Mode Selection 0= ESC port ???

Auto Overhead Rate
ESC Async Port Selection 0 = RS-232, Physical ESC port type.
RS-232 1 = RS-485 2 wire,
2 = RS-485 4 wire,
3 = RS-485 Drvr On
ESC Async Rate Selection 0 to 7 selects standard Physical ESC port rate at rear
9.600 kbps rates 0.300 kbps – 38.4 panel.
kbps
ESC Async Format Selection 0 = N,7,1, Physical ESC port format at rear
N,8,1 1 = P,7,1 panel.
2 = N,8,1
3 = P,8,1
ESC Async CTS Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC CTS line control
Normal Active
ESC Async DCD Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC DCD line control
Normal Active
ESC Async DTR Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Ignore ESC DTR line control
Ignore

3-74 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

High Speed Serial Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
ESC Async DSR Selection 0 = Normal, 1 = Force ESC DRS line control
Force Active Active

MCC Mode Selection 0 = Disable Activates the Modem Control

Full Access 1 = Read Only Channel (MCC)
2 = Full Access Any selection other than Disabled
makes other menu selection
below visible
MCC Protocol Selection 0 = M7 Binary Packet Sets the Protocol of the MCC
M7 Binary Packet 1 = M500 AUPC Packet
MCC Send Address Numeric 0 to 255, 255 = Global Sets the Send Address of the
1 MCC
MCC Rcv Address Numeric 0 to 254 Sets the Rcv Address of the
1 MCC
MCC Activity Selection 0 = None Sets the front panel indication on
None 1 = Beep MCC activity.
2 = Blink Online Lamp
3 = Beep & Blink Online
Lamp

Event Send Clock Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Send
2 = Log & Send Alert Clock activity alarm
Event Send Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Send
2 = Log & Send Alert Data activity alarm
Event Rcv Data Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Rcv Data
2 = Log & Send Alert activity alarm
Event Backward Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Backward
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event BER Loss Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the BER Loss
2 = Log & Send Alert alarm
Event Buffer Slip Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the
Do Not Log 1 = Log change in status of the Buffer
2 = Log & Send Alert Slip alarm
Event Minor Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Minor alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Major Alarm Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the activity
Do Not Log 1 = Log of any Major alarms
2 = Log & Send Alert
Event Test Active Selection 0 = Do Not Log Selects whether to log the status
Do Not Log 1 = Log of the Test Active alarm
2 = Log & Send Alert

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-75

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

High Speed Serial Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Event Hardware Alarm Selection 1 = Log Selects whether to set an alert for
Do Not Log 2 = Log & Send Alert the status of the Hardware alarm

Alarm Send Clock Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Send Data Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Send Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Tx interface. (0 =
Disable)
Alarm Rcv Data Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Rcv Data Idle Numeric 0000 to 9999 Sec Sets the time before an alarm is
30 sec. raised after there is no data
detected at the Rcv interface. (0
= Disable)
Alarm Backward Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm BER Loss Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Test Active Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B
Alarm Hardware Mask Selection 0 = None, 1 = to Alarm A, Selects destination of alarm
to Alarm A & B 2 = to Alarm B,
3 = to Alarm A & B

Test Ter Loopback Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable Interface terrestrial loop-back

Disabled send input to receive output.
Test Sat Loopback Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable Interface satellite loop-back
Disabled receive output to send input.
Test BER I/O Selection 0 = Satellite, BERT Transmit output and
Satellite 1 = Terrestrial Receive input direction..
Test Send BER Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = 2047, BERT enable to modem transmit
Disabled 2 = 2^23-1 input.
3 = Insert 1 Error
(if enabled)
Test Rcv BER Selection 0 = Disable, 1 = 2047, BERT enable from modem
2^23-1 2 = 2^23-1 receive output.
Test BER Read Only Enter to restart test BER measurement of the active
5.253E-8 test if ‘‘Test Rcv BER’ is active

3-76 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

High Speed Serial Interface Parameters

Representation Type Entry Description
Test BER Sync Loss Read Only Enter to restart test Measurement of the number of
0 sync losses in the active test if
‘‘Test Rcv BER’ is active
Test BER Errors Read Only Enter to restart test Measurement of the number of
15 bit errors in the active test if ‘Test
Rcv BER’ is active
Test BER Bits Read Only Enter to restart test Total Bits in active test
2.853E9 measurement if ‘Test Rcv BER’ is
active
Test BER EFS Read Only Enter to restart test Error free seconds in the active
94.35% test measurement if ‘Test Rcv
BER’ is active
Test BER Erred Sec Read Only Enter to restart test Errored seconds in the active test
15 measurement if ‘Test Rcv BER’ is
active
Test BER Total Sec Read Only Enter to restart test Total seconds in the active test
8485 measurement if ‘Test Rcv BER’ is
active
Test Send Bit Offset Read Only N/A Monitor of the frequency offset of
0 PPM the incoming bit clock reference
to the internal modem reference
standard.
Test Rcv Bit Offset Read Only N/A Monitor of the frequency offset of
0 PPM the bit clock recovered from the
satellite, reference to the internal
modem reference standard.

Feature Options Read Only N/A

None
Feature Activation Numeric 20 characters Allows entry of a Feature code to
00000000000000000000 activate new features.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-77

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.6. Remote Command Interface Control

The modem command mode allows the use of an external controller or computer to monitor and
control the modem via a packet-based message protocol. This mode normally uses the RS–485
connection which allows multiple modems (and other devices) to share the command link under
control of a single or multiple entities. An RS–232 connection is also allowed but is for only a single
controller and single modem and cannot share the command link with other devices.

The packets use a unique address for each controlled device, which is set using the modem’s front
panel. The message packets themselves use a binary format for efficiency. The complete protocol is
shown in Appendix B.

The protocol consists of messages from the controller to the modem and response messages from
the modem back to the controller. The modem never initiates communications without having first
received a correctly addressed and formed message requiring a response.

Message packets to the modem can take two forms;

1. Messages requesting information in a response message or “Read”;

2. Messages commanding a change in operating parameters or “Write”.

Any write information is automatically saved to non-volatile memory

The packets of both incoming and outgoing messages take the same generic form. First are pad and
opening flag, then the destination and source addresses, followed by the command code (and read or
write mode), then necessary data. The message packet is closed with a closing flag and check word
to verify the packet integrity. The use of a source address allows multiple controllers on a single
control link.

NOTE: Special considerations are required when legacy modems are to be connected on the same
command line with the latest modes. See Appendix B for more information.

3.7. Modem Configuration

Configuring the modem operating parameters is essential before placing the unit into service. The
modem operating parameters may be set up using the front panel, the USB or the terminal command
mode. The binary remote control input may also be used if the remote interface parameters are
already known and set.

3.7.1. Configuring the Modem for Operation

The following description assumes that the modem setup is to be done manually at a depot location
or in the field via the front panel. Alternately, the modem could be automatically set up using a
controller and the command interface. No software is provided for such an external control application
and therefore this task is the responsibility of the using organization.

3.7.2. Setting Essential Parameters

The setting of several basic parameters is essential to achieve proper operation and carrier lock with
the modem. Improper setting of any of these parameters will result in failure to communicate with the
far end of the link. These basic parameters are listed here to serve as a minimum checklist for
installation. There are many other parameters, which must be set on the modem to configure
operation within a system. These include setting parameters for interface compatibility; automatic
correction for link properties; and alarm relay and display configuration. The discussion in the
following sections is to be used as a starting point and is not expected to explain every possible
configuration available in the modem.

3.7.2.1. Modulator and Demodulator

1. Carrier Frequency (Note special procedures below available for L-Band interfaces.)
2. Modulation Mode (BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, etc.)

3-78 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3. Bit Rate
4. FEC Code Rate
5. Scrambler (Normally Enabled in IESS 308/309 mode – See “Using The Proper Scramble”
below)
6. Clock sources set per system requirements.
7. Reed-Solomon Codec settings if enabled
8. IBS Multiplexer settings if enabled
9. External reference set properly

3.7.2.2. Modulator
1. Output Level
2. Carrier Enable
3. The L-Band modem can also supply power and reference to a BUC.

3.7.2.3. Demodulator
1. Carrier Acquisition Mode and Acquisition Range
2. The L-Band modems with L-Band Receive can be set to supply power at either 13 or 18
VDC and/or a 10 MHz reference signal on the receive input connector for coupling to the
LNB via the receive cable.

3.7.3. Using the Proper Scrambler

The modem has an “Auto” mode used to automatically select the preferred scrambler setting in any
FEC or other dependent mode. This replaces the previous “IESS 308” or “IESS-309” or “auto modes”
used in legacy Datum modems. There is no IESS Standard covering the Turbo Product Codes FEC.
The Auto mode is highly recommended. Following are the settings chosen by the modem when in
Auto Scrambler mode:

 When TPC is either not installed or not enabled the preferred scrambler and descrambler is
automatically selected to “IESS 308” or “IESS 309”. See below for the difference.
 When TPC is enabled but the IBS multiplexer option is not installed or not enabled “Auto” uses
the new Scrambler and Descrambler option #7 “TPC Sync” this uses a synchronous scrambler
specific to the TPC Codec.
 When both TPC and IBS multiplexer are installed and enabled Auto uses the “IESS 308” option.

Remember that the scrambler and descrambler may be set independently in each link direction.

3.7.3.1. IESS-308 Scrambler Mode Operation

 With no mux or RS, the self-synchronizing Intelsat scrambler is used
 With just the IBS mux enabled, the IBS synchronous scrambler is used
 With just the RS enabled, the RS synchronous scrambler is used
 With both IBS Mux and RS enabled, the IBS synchronous scrambler is used.

3.7.3.2. IESS-309 Scrambler Mode Operation

The operation is the same as the IESS-308 option with the exception that with just RS enabled, the
self-synchronizing Intelsat scrambler is used.

3.7.3.3. Fixed Scrambler Mode Operation

The V.35 and Intelsat scrambler modes use the V.35 and Intelsat self-synchronizing scramblers
respectively in all modes.

3.7.3.4. Alternate Scrambler Mode Operation

The alternate V.35 and alternate Intelsat scrambler mode performs a data inversion required by some
legacy “Comstream” modems.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-79

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.7.4. Using the Internal or an External Reference

The modem contains an internal Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) reference
which determines the basic accuracy of all modem frequency and rate settings. This internal
reference is nominally 2.0 ppm stability over normal operating temperature, and exhibits aging less
than 1 ppm per year. If this accuracy is not sufficient, or the network operating mode dictates, an
external reference can be used.
-7
The M7L/LT, uses an Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator (OCXO) and the standard unit has a 1 x 10
-7
stability and 2 to 3 x 10 aging rate per year. The increased stability is necessary because the
oscillator can be used as the reference for a BUC.

The external reference frequency is applied at the rear panel BNC connector, J1, at a frequency of 1,
5, 9 or 10 MHz. Selection of the external reference and the reference frequency are selected at the
front panel from the <Unit: Reference - Source =External>, setting to external which then enables
the entry for <Unit: Reference - Frequency>.

The external reference input does not perform any clean-up of an input other than band-pass filtering
with a pass-band from approximately 1 to 12 MHz. The reference input should therefore be a low
phase noise source.

3.7.5. Using the M7L/LT BUC Reference Control

The M7L/LT modem contains a high stability 10 MHz OCXO reference oscillator designed to provide
a suitable reference signal to the Block Up Converter (BUC). The application of the reference to the
transmit cable is under front panel or remote control, as required by the BUC. Some BUCs use the 10
MHz signal to control application of power to the final PA, removing it and going to a low power state
when the 10 MHz is absent. This reference is activated in the <Mod: BUC – 10 MHz Ref> parameter.
NOTE: See the specifications in Appendix A for the exact reference stability, aging, phase noise and
level specifications.

3.7.6. Using the M7L/LT LNB Reference Control

The M7L/LT modem contains a high stability 10 MHz OCXO reference oscillator designed to provide
a suitable reference signal to the Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB). The application of the
reference to the receive cable is under front panel or remote control, as required by the LNB. This
reference is activated in the <Demod: LNB – 10 MHz Ref> parameter.
NOTE: See the specifications in Appendix A for the exact reference stability, aging, phase noise and
level specifications.

3.7.7. Using the M7L/LT Transmit RF Frequency Feature

The M7L/LT modem output can be tuned to any frequency between 950 to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz
increments. The modem can display the actual satellite RF frequency being transmitted at the BUC
output. To enable this feature simply supply the <Mod: BUC – LO Frequency> parameter with a
value other than “0”. When the value set here is equal to the BUC’s LO frequency then the modem
can automatically compute the RF frequency at the BUC output.

The M7L/LT modem will also set the proper spectrum for high side or low side LO. If the BUC has a
Low side LO, the spectrum is not inverted and the <Mod: BUC – Xmt Spectrum > setting would
typically be set for “Non-Inverted”.

NOTE: After entering a new <Mod: BUC – LO Frequency> parameter, the modem requires a new
Transmit IF frequency input to recalculate the proper output frequency setting.

To return to using the L-Band IF frequency setting, simply enter a value of “0” into the <Mod: BUC –
LO Frequency> parameter.

Common BUC LO frequency for the 5.925 to 6.425 GHz C-Band range is 4900 MHz (low side LO),
while a low side LO for the 14.0 to 14.5 GHz Ku Band range is 13050 MHz.

3-80 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.7.8. Using the M7L/LT Receive RF Frequency Feature

The M7L (and M7LT) can be tuned to any frequency between 950 to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz increments.
The modem can display the actual satellite RF frequency being received at the LNB input. To enable
this feature simply supply the <Demod: LNB – LO Frequency> parameter with a value other than
“0”. When the value set here is equal to the LNB’s LO frequency then the modem can automatically
compute the RF frequency at the LNB input.

The M7L/LT modems will also set the proper spectrum for high side or low side LO. If the LNB has a
Low side LO, the spectrum is not inverted and the <Demod: LNB – Rcv Spectrum> setting would
typically be set for “Non-Inverted”.

NOTE: After entering a new <Demod: LNB – LO Frequency> parameter the modem requires a new
Receive IF frequency input to recalculate the proper input frequency setting.

To return to using the L-Band IF frequency setting, simply enter a value of “0” into the <Demod: LNB
– LO Frequency> parameter.

Common LO frequency for the 3.7 to 4.2 GHz C-Band range is 5150 MHz (high side LO), while a
common LO for the 11.7 to 12.2 GHz Ku Band range is 10750 MHz (low side LO).

3.7.9. Using the M7LT BUC Control

The M7LT offers features related to the control and use of an outdoor Block Up Converter (BUC)

 BUC Power Control – The M7LT contain an internal BUC power supply and internal power relay
to control application of power to the L-Band transmit cable under front panel or remote control.
The modem can also read the voltage and current being applied to the transmit cable.
 Transmit Frequency Control – When the BUC Local Oscillator or LO frequency is entered into
the <Mod: BUC – LO Frequency> parameter, the <Mod: IF – Frequency> parameter requires
entry of transmit frequency at the actual satellite uplink RF frequency. To return to using L-Band
IF frequencies set the <Mod: BUC – LO Frequency> parameter to “0”.
 BUC Transmit Gain – The <Mod: BUC – Xmt Gain> parameter is used to set the desired gain
of the BUC.
 BUC Transmit Level Max – When the <Mod: BUC – Xmt Level Max> parameter is set, the
M7LT will provide an alarm if the output level exceeds the setting.
 BUC FSK Remote M&C – When the <Mod: BUC – FSK Remote M&C> parameter is “Enabled”,
the M7LT provides the ability to control a ‘smart BUC’ from the front panel or remotely via the
control interface.

3.7.10. Using the M7LT LNB Control

The M7LT offers features related to the control and use of an outdoor Low Noise Block Down
Converter (LNB).

 Receive Frequency Control – When the LNB Local Oscillator or LO frequency is entered into
the <Demod: LNB – LO Frequency> parameter the <Demod: IF – Frequency> parameter
requires entry of receive frequency at the actual satellite downlink RF frequency. To return to
using L-Band IF frequencies set the <Demod: LNB – LO Frequency> parameter to “0”.
 LNB Power Control – The M7LT contain an internal LNB power supply and internal power relay
to control application of power to the LNB’s receive output cable under front panel or remote
control. The voltage applied can be chosen for either 18VDC or 13 VDC. The modem can also
read the voltage and current being applied to the receive cable.

3.7.11. Carrier Acquisition Parameters

The modem has two main modes and several programmable receive carrier acquisition parameters
available. These parameters control the initial acquisition of a carrier and reacquisition of a carrier
that has been removed and reapplied.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-81

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

There are two acquisition methods used by the modem. The normal mode for fastest possible
acquisition (especially at low data rates) is the “Fast” mode which utilizes an onboard digital signal
processor (DSP) to mathematically determine the location of the carrier and lock as fast as possible.
This mode initially goes for the largest carrier power within the acquisition range. A new acquisition
attempt will always repeat the same process and go to the same carrier. The “fast” acquisition mode
is optimized for the fastest possible acquisition speed, and is set as the default acquisition mode for
the modem.

A second mode called “Search” also uses the DSP but performs a piece-wise sweep of the
programmable acquisition range to locate the carrier and lock to it. If the modem cannot lock to the
first carrier it detects it will attempt to find another carrier in the next step of frequency. The sweep
always starts at the low end of the acquisition range and moves upward, wrapping around to the low
end when the top is reached.

NOTE: The Search mode is optimized for crowded spectrum applications where nearby high power
carriers may interfere with the standard “Fast” acquisition mode.

The acquisition mode is set by setting the <Demod: IF - Sweep Mode> option parameter to either
“Fast” (0), or “Search” (1). The “Fast” mode is the standard setting.

3.7.11.1. Initial Acquisition

For initial acquisition, a single setting allows programming the acquisition sweep range that the
modem will search to find an available carrier. This parameter can be set from  100 Hz  1.25 MHz,
where  30 kHz is common for standard demodulators. If all of the system offsets are known and
stable for a given installation, the initial acquisition range can be set to a low value which will slightly
reduce acquisition time, especially at low data rates. Conversely if system frequency offsets are not
known, or change over time, the initial acquisition range should be set very wide to allow locking to a
carrier well outside the typical range.

 CAUTION!: If the acquisition range is set too small and the system offsets drift, then a carrier may
be locked out of acquisition or lost during operation. If the acquisition range is set too
wide and other compatible carriers are within the acquisition range, then the wrong
carrier may be acquired.

3.7.11.2. Carrier Re-acquisition

For <Demod: IF - Sweep Mode=Search>, the modem attempts to find a carrier in a reduced search
range for a specified period of time before reverting to the standard search range. The reduced
sweep range is equal to the symbol rate in Hertz. Once < Demodulator: IF - Sweep Mode=Search>
acquisition mode is set, the < Demodulator: IF - Sweep Time> parameter setting controls the
acquisition search time in the reduced range.

NOTE: The reduced sweep range is referenced the last demodulator lock offset.

3.7.12. Interface Type Configuration

The modem has the capability to implement several different interface types. The modem processor
automatically determines the presence and type of the installed interface(s) and options by querying
the interface card slots. The installed interface part number will be displayed in the < Unit: Status -
Slot 3 ID> front panel display. If there is more than one interface type installed in the modem, the <
Unit: Status - Slot 4 ID> will display the part number of the second installed interface. Selection of
the active interface is done in the < Modulator: Data - Send Interface> and < Demodulator: Data -
Rcv Interface> parameter settings.

The following interface types are currently available as options within the M7 modem.

 Multi-protocol Synchronous Serial Data interface (S7)

 Advanced IP interface with internal bridge/router (I7)
 Express Ethernet interface (E7)

3-82 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

 Dual G.703/E1 with Drop and Insert interface (G7)

 High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) (H7)

NOTE: Adding an optional interface card or changing an already installed interface should only be
attempted by experienced personnel familiar with electronic communications equipment.
Refer to Section 2.3.8.2 for details on how to add or change an interface option.

3.7.13. Alarm configuration

The modem alarm system represents a sophisticated method of controlling visual, relay and logical
alarm outputs which can be used for multiple purposes including redundancy. The modem alarm
outputs are:

 two alarm relays (A & B)

 three front panel LEDs (Modulator, Demodulator, and Summary)
 two open collector alarms on the interface card (Modulator & Demodulator)
 one redundancy switch request

A basic representation of the alarm system functioning is shown in the Figure 3-43.

Individual Alarms Processing Matrix Outputs

Summary Alarm
Unit Alarms
Reference
Test Active
NC
Hardware Alarm Relay A
NO
C
Modulator Alarms
NC
Carrier Alarm Relay B
NO
Bit Clock C
Test Active
Hardware Front Panel
No Data
Selection
Demodulator Alarms Modulator Data
Logic
Carrier Lock Alarm Interface
Low Level
Low Eb/No
Test Active
Hardware
No Data
Front Panel
Interface Alarms Demodulator
BER Loss Alarm Data
Test Active Interface
Option Fail

Redundancy
Switch Request

Figure 3-43 - Alarm Processing

There are many possible alarm inputs depending on the modem options and configuration. Each of
the individual alarm inputs has a configuration selection parameter under the “Alarm” column of its
operation matrix. Alarm inputs can be set to be ignored, be an “OR” inputs to the A or B alarm relay,
or be an “OR” inputs to both the A and B alarm relay. The default setting for the alarm matrix is for all

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-83

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

modulator related alarms assigned to Alarm A and all demodulator related alarms assigned to Alarm
B.

The open collector outputs for the modulator and demodulator alarms are available on the data
interface connector and may be used by redundancy switches for determining alarm status. The
modem’s built-in redundancy switch logic uses either all alarms or combinations of the A and B
alarms to activate a switch request.

The summary Alarm LED is the “OR” function of either of the alarm relays. The modem allows the
user to select such items as a low input level or Eb/No to activate an alarm. By providing two relays
and the configuration options, several alternative alarm indication scenarios can be arranged.

Descriptions of alarm conditions that can be mapped to alarm outputs are shown in Table 3-5 through
Table 3-10.

3.7.14. Setting the Modem Station ID Name

Each modem contains two unique identification entries available at the front panel or remotely. They
are the unit serial number and the Unit Name or “Station ID”. The serial number is set at the factory
and cannot be changed, but the Station ID can be set and changed whenever necessary. This field
allows identification of the modem with up to 16 characters.

The Station ID can be set in the front panel <Unit: Status – Station ID> parameter and pressing
“Edit” to begin entry. Each character position is selected using the right and left arrow keys, and the
character at that position is set using the up and down arrow keys. When the proper entry is achieved
press the “Enter” key to finalize the input. The first character is the “Space” followed by the characters
below.

Table 3-13 – ASCII Characters Available for Unit Station ID

ASCII Characters Available for Unit Station ID
Char Char Char Char Char Char Char
! / . M ] l {
“ 0 ? N ^ m |
# 1 @ O _ n }
$ 2 A P ‘ o 
% 3 B Q a p 
& 4 C R b q &
‘ 5 D S c r
( 6 E T d s
) 7 F U e t
* 8 G V f u
+ 9 H W g v
, : I X h w
- ; J Y I x
. < K Z j y
= L [ k z

When entering this parameter via a terminal connected to the remote port, the Station ID name is
entered directly as text from the terminal keyboard. After any entry mode the processor will center the
input characters on the lower line of the LCD display

3-84 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.7.15. Setting the Modem Address for Command Mode Operation

If Command Mode Binary Packet Operation is desired the modem packet “address” must be set via
the front panel before the modem will recognize packets. To activate Binary Packet RS-485 remote
control and set the address, navigate to the <Unit: Remote – RS-485 Mode> parameter and set to
‘Full Access’. Then navigate to the <Unit: Remote – RS-485 Protocol> and set to ‘Binary Packet’.
Then navigate to the <Unit: Remote – RS-485 Address> and use the numeric keypad to enter the
address from 0 to 255. Then press the “Enter” key to enable the change.

The address 255 is “global” and all units will respond to a message packet with this address
regardless of its setting, but no unit will return a response message. It is suggested that you do not
use addresses 1 or 255 (1 is the factory setting, and any new unit added to a system will have
address 1).

The address “0” is also unique. This address causes the modem to accept commands and send
responses without the address fields normally required in the command packets.

3.8. Data Interface Options - Technical Details

3.8.1. I7 – Advanced IP Interface
The I7 IP interface uses a sophisticated processor consisting of an x86 based embedded computer
on a module which is plugged into the interface card. The module is referred to here as a “Q7”
because it follows a computer interface standard know as Q-seven. The Q7 is a complete x86 based
embedded Linux computer including multiple interfaces. The interface board with Q7 module is
housed entirely within the M7 (I7) series of Datum Systems satellite modems.

The purpose of the I7 with Q7 processor is to act as an interface between IP Ethernet networks and
satellite modems as part of point-to-point or point-to-multipoint data transfer. The I7 is not a fixed
dumb interface, it is a full sophisticated router class device and therefore requires configuration.

The purpose of this section is to introduce the IP interface cards that use the Q7 processor based
platform for routing and bridging. Detailing the full capabilities of these IP cards is beyond the scope
of this section. Our goal here instead is to:

1. Introduce you to this card,

2. Show initial set up the or I7 IP addresses allowing access for full configuration,
3. Show a few initial Vyatta configuration methods.
4. Show command line methods of modem control from these cards.

3.8.1.1. More about the Q7 Processor Cards

The Q7 Linux software starts life as a standard Vyatta Router which normally contains virtually all of a
standard Debian OS overlaid with the Vyatta Router system. We modify both Debian and Vyatta for
this application and also add modifications to support the M7 series of modems. The Vyatta Router
provides an industry standard open source and very consistent router facility. The modem
modifications consists of changes to the Linux/Debian drivers to support our custom embedded board
and modem interface plus some changes to the Vyatta system and finally added programs
specifically intended for monitor and control of the specific host modem. Everything added except
some tweaks to the underlying kernel to aid in reboot is accomplished by standard Debian packages
and the installed “apt” package management system. Users of Linux and Vyatta should feel
comfortable in this environment while users standard routers should also adapt very quickly.

The Q7-IP provides the following features:

 Powerful x86 Atom processor based. Up to 1.6 GHz and dual virtual processors.
 Robust Debian Linux Operating System – currently modified Debian “Squeeze”.
 Industry Standard Vyatta Router overlay on Linux for IOS/JunOS like control. One major
advantage of Vyatta is that it provides a clean single point configuration interface and saved
configuration file.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-85

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

 Datum System's modifications and additions to both Linux and Vyatta providing modem
command line and web control.
 Custom applications become relatively easy with multiple built-in user available programming
languages including Bash, Perl, Python, C and C++ compilers.

Although the I7 is more complex and expensive than the previous generation SnIP, this system offers
significant advantages. Not only does it use an industry standard router subsystem, but the full power
of Debian Linux is available including many languages (like Python), standard compilers and the
Debian packaging system which allow a user to install almost any program made for Linux. An
installed system is even capable of compiling its own programs.

This Tech Note describes the basic resources and procedures necessary to initially install, configure,
modify, and update the Q7 Vyatta system and Linux Kernel as necessary.

3.8.1.2. Naming Conventions Terms and Definitions

For the purposes of the remainder of this document the conventions for naming the different portions
of the Linux operating system and technical terms are given below in short form. Almost everything
here is standard terminology and more information is available on the web:

1. “Kernel and Kernel Space”. These refer to the Linux kernel itself and the modules that are
compiled with the kernel to be loaded as part of the kernel. The current kernel is Version
2.6.35 minimum and some 3.x systems are in testing.
2. “User and User Space” Multiple types of programs can exist in the user space. The user
space is where all the files that a user can directly interact with reside. This includes the
control programs and configuration files for the routing and bridging functions as created by
Vyatta.
3. “Root Filesystem” The Root Filesystem consists of the kernel modules not built into the
kernel, common and user libraries and all of the user space programs and configuration. The
Datum Systems' implementation is based on the Debian “Sqeeze” distribution of Linux with
Vyatta router overlay and Datum Systems additions specific to satellite modem use.
4. “Packages” are the Linux term for software programs and drivers. The entire Linux system
consists of a small set of kernel and base programs with many packages added to provide
the particular capabilities needed for its intended use. Most of the drivers and virtually all of
the user space programs are packages. Packages can be installed removed and upgraded
via the package manager. In the Q7 X86 card the package manager is named “APT” and
common package functions are performed using the apt-get command line directives.
5. “Package Repository” is a web location containing groups of packages which can be
installed in the Linux system via the package manager. Two are necessary, the Vyatta
repository and the Datum Systems repository although there are many more available
including the standard Debian repository.
6. “I7” These are the base IP interface cards for the M7 modems. The Q7 processor is
plugged into these base “carrier' cards as the processing element.
7. “LAN and WAN” are terms for the Local Area Network and Wide Area Network interfaces
standard on the I7. The LAN is always the standard Ethernet TCP/IP Gigabit Ethernet port
(GbE) on the rear panel of the interface card. It's interface name is “eth0”. The WAN is the
internal custom interface port which connects to the modem. Because it appears to Linux
and Vyatta as a standard Ethernet port its default name is “eth1”, although that can be
changed.
8. “Static and DHCP” Are two possible ways of configuring the LAN side IP addresses and
masks. By default the eth0 LAN is configured with a static IP address.
9. “Console and Terminal Sessions” These refer to a command line connection to the I7.
The console is a standard serial RS-232 connection on the rear of the interface card which
can be connected to a computer running a standard terminal emulation program such as
Hyperterminal or Putty or Linux minicom and other programs. A terminal session is a more
generic term and can refer to virtual terminal sessions connected via TCP/IP in either Telnet
or SSH mode. Both present the standard Linux/Vyatta command line interface.

3-86 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

10. “Bridge” is the standard network term for an OSI model Layer 2 process that is intended to
connect two segments of the same LAN together having common IP addresses within the
same LAN mask. The bridge function only looks at MAC addresses. A bridge can be
compared to a smart switch.
11. “Router” is the standard network term for Layer 3 processes intended to direct and control
traffic in a transmission system between two or more networks with different addresses. It
operates on the OSI Model Layer 3, working with IP Addresses. Commonly routing also
includes the concepts of multiple processes including NAT, traffic shaping, QOS, etc.
12. “daemon” is a term for a program that runs separately in the background and produces little
or no output to any of the terminal sessions running, instead sending output to log files.
There are a significant number of daemons always running in Linux, but in a sleep state
waiting for some input that requires their attention.

3.8.1.3. About LAN IP Addresses and Network Masks

The modem only displays a single IP address and mask for the LAN interface. Vyatta however is
capable of having multiple IP addresses for each interface. Vyatta also enters and displays network
masks in the CIDR mask-prefix format – that is the class C mask of 255.255.255.0 is shown and
entered as “/24”. This mask-prefix refers to the number of leading 1's in the mask.

The standard operation of the modem front panel entries is to replace the first address in the Vyatta
configuration. If there is no address currently then the front panel entry will add that as the first
address. The polling software does this by detecting the front panel change and first deleting the
existing first address and then adding the new one entered. That is also the normal Vyatta method for
replacing an IP address - delete the current and set (add) the new one.

In Vyatta if an interface is to get its IP address and mask via DHCP then its address is actually set to
“dhcp”. On the modem when the front panel “dhcp” parameter is set to “1” or enabled then Vyatta
sets its IP address to “dhcp” and forwards the obtained leased address to the modem's IP address
parameter. If DHCP is then disabled it will retain the leased address. To set a new static IP address
you enter the new desired address either on the front panel or in Vyatta's configure mode.

The comparable IP entries on the modem front panel verses the Vyatta configuration, are shown in
the table below. In Vyatta a single configuration entry encompasses the three (3) controls on the
modem front panel.

Vyatta Configuration M7 Modem FP Display

DHCP: Disabled
Address: 192.168.2.131/24
IP Address: 192.168.2.131
[Optional additional addresses]
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Address: dhcp DHCP: Enabled
Note: DHCP lease address sent to IP Address: 192.168.4.109
modem. Mask 255.255.255.0

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-87

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.8.1.4. Initial Installation and Configuration

It is highly advised that you also read the documentation at www.vyatta.org to get a feel for
configuring and controlling the Vyatta router. Vyatta is a modern up to date router overlay on Linux
comparable to Cisco or Juniper IOS and using similar language and procedures.

The following is a short list of initial configuration items:

1. Connect the two modems into your network as normal and turn on the modems. Modem
parameters are configured as normal either via the front panel or remote methods. Make
sure that you connect an Ethernet cable to the I7, preferably with access to the Internet if
you intend to download packages.
2. Wait approximately 1 to 2 minutes for the Q7 to boot completely. In the meantime determine
and set your modem parameters on both ends.
3. Setting the IP Address - The I7 interface card is factory configured with a default static IP
address, for example 192.168.2.130 or similar, which can be read on the modem front panel
display in the interface section. If this is not within your network either set a new IP address
on the modem front panel or log into the console port of the Interface board at: 9600,N,8,1
and use Vyatta to set an IP address.

NOTE: On the modem front panel you must select either the “Mod” or “Dem” tab below the LCD
display first, then make sure the transmit and receive interface is selected as “I7”. At this
point, the “Intf” tab will show on the front panel. Selecting the “Intf” tab will allow configuration
of the I7 parameters.

Setting the LAN IP address on the modem front panel is the easiest method to get started with a new
modem.- Simply navigate to the interface and scroll right to the IP column and then down until you
see the listed IP address. Enter or edit to input the new desired IP address and press enter.

For later setting or resetting of IP addresses and the complete Vyatta configuration, it is most easily
done via the console or an SSH or telnet session To log in the default user is Vyatta and the default
password is Vyatta. You can change these and add other users easily.

The M7 modem will replace the current Vyatta configured first IP address and save the configuration.

3-88 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.8.2. Express Ethernet Interface (E7)

The E7 Express Ethernet interface is a layer 2 Ethernet bridge that provides high speed switched
Ethernet capability to the M7. The E7 interface does not provide any IP routing functionality.

The purpose of the E7 is to act as an interface for up to four (4) Ethernet LAN ports within a single
satellite modems as part of point-to-point or point-to-multipoint satellite network. The E7 also offers a
fifth interface port that complies with the Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) standard. The SFP port
will allow interfacing to optical interfaces or will add an additional GbE port to the M7.

Detailing the internal design criteria and future capabilities of these cards is beyond the scope of this
section. Instead this section will provide an overview of the card functionality and provide typical
network configurations where this card is used within a satellite network. A simplified block diagram
is shown in Figure 3-44.

MCC

QoS Buffer
Mod HDLC

Port 1
10/100/ RJ45 SAT WAN
1000Base-T Loopback

Congestion Idle Frame

Port 2 Generator
10/100/ RJ45 feedback
1000Base-T
Transmit
Port 3
GbE Multi-Port
10/100/ RJ45 Receive
Switch
1000Base-T
Dmd 1 to Slot A To/From M7
Port 4 GbE Swtich Interface Mod/Dmd
Dmd 1 HDLC
10/100/ RJ45
1000Base-T

MCC
Port 5 Ter WAN
SFP
1000Base-X Loopback
Cage
Optical
Recepticle for Dmd 2 to Slot B From M7
Dmd 2 HDLC
Optional SFP GbE Switch Interface Dmd 2
Interface
Internal
MCC
Monitor & Control

CPU Section CPU Interface M7 Controller

Figure 3-44 - Express Ethernet Interface Block Diagram

3.8.2.1. Gigabit Ethernet Ports 1 Through 4

The physical interface connectors for Ports 1 - 4 are conventional RJ-45 10/100/1000 copper
interfaces. The connectors interface to four (4) ports of the multi-port internal Ethernet switch.

Each port can be activated by the menu <Intf: I/O Port x Mode = Data I/O> (x=1 to 4). If a port is not
being used, the port can be disabled by the menu <Intf: I/O Port x Mode = Disabled> (x=1 to 4). If
the E7 interface is installed in a multi-demod M7, the configuration of the ports will need to reflect the
data flow from the multi-demod(s) to the central router. This will be typical of a point to multipoint
network where the Hub site has a single modulator and multiple demodulators. In this case, the hub
router would need to interface to a single transmit port and multiple demod ports. Using the menu
<Intf: I/O Port x Mode = Dmd Output I/O> (x=1 to 4) and menu <Intf: I/O Port x Mode = Dmd Input
I/O> (x=1 to 4), the multiple demodulator output data ports can be connected to the single router port
by using the internal Ethernet switch within the E7 interface. This configuration will be explained in
more detail in the network configuration discussion in Section 0

The type of connection for each port can be configured independently in the menu <Intf: I/O Port x
Connection = Auto> (x=1 to 4). . The most common setting for a port once it is activated will be

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-89

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

“Auto” but each port can be configured to “1000BASE-T”, “100BASE-T Full Duplex”, “100BASE-T Half
Duplex”, “10BASE-T Full Duplex”, or “10BASE-T Half Duplex”.

3.8.2.2. SFP Interface - Port 5

This port allows the E7 to offer a wide variety of optical interfaces (1000Base-T, 1000Base-SX
multimode, and 1000Base-LX and BX single mode) from qualified vendors. In addition, the SFP
interface can offer an additional GbE interface port to the internal Ethernet switch. The M7 will
recognize if there is a SFP module installed and will provide the appropriate menus for control.

NOTE: <Intf: I/O Port 5 Mode = Data I/O> Port 5 will only show in the menu when there is an SFP
module installed in the SFP slot.

3.8.2.3. Flow Control

The M7 transmission is classified as FDMA and as such has a constant bit rate for transmission over
the satellite, which is the WAN side of the E7 interface. Conversely, an Ethernet interface can have
significant variability in the instantaneous bit rate and through flow control will settle in to a long term
average of the constant bit rate of the FDMA link. QoS buffering is provided at the output of the
internal Ethernet switch to store data until it is needed for transmit to the WAN. The QoS mode can
be configured in the menu <Intf: QOS Mode> to either “WRED” (Waited Random Early Detection) or
“Strict Priority”. These settings will determine the procedure for dropping packets at the point where
the QoS buffer has reached the point of congestion. The default setting is WRED.

Additionally, the E7 allows the user to set flow control for the QoS buffer for a non-congested state
and full congestion of the WAN traffic. This is set in the menu item <Intf: QOS WAN Drop None> for
the non-congested state and <Intf: QOS WAN Drop All> for the congestion point where all incoming
packets will be dropped until the QoS buffer drops below this setting. Between the QoS buffer
settings of “Drop None” and “Drop All”, there is an expectation that some packets will be dropped in
line with the “QoS Mode”.

The proper setting of “Drop None” and “Drop All” is dependent on the type of traffic, i.e. VoIP, Web,
Streaming Video, FTP, etc., that is transiting the network and the constant data rate of the WAN
satellite link. These settings correspond to the fill status of the QoS buffer. The “Drop None” setting
is the point below which there is no flow control activated.

The “Drop None” minimum setting should represent the time, in mSec, that is equivalent to at least 2
Ethernet packets. For example if the M7 modulator is set to transmit at 1Mbps toward the WAN, set
the menu item <Intf: QOS WAN Drop None = 24 ms>. This would be the minimum setting for this
configuration. The recommended maximum setting would be set to half of the “Drop All” setting.

The “Drop All” setting will determine the maximum delay that the QoS buffer will add to the network.
Certain traffic types that are sensitive to delay will require that the “Drop All” value be set to a
minimum value but if this is set too low, the E7 will drop packets when large packet Web content is
transmitted toward the WAN. The recommended minimum setting for the “Drop All” would represent
the time, in mSec, that is equivalent to at least 20 Ethernet packets. For example if the M7 modulator
is set to transmit at 1Mbps toward the WAN, set the menu item <Intf: QOS WAN Drop All = 240
ms>. The setting of the “Drop All” can be arbitrary and may need to be adjusted to optimize the
network performance once the traffic types are known.

3-90 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.8.2.4. WAN Mode

The E7 allows for Ethernet bridge functionality in either a point-to-point (PtP) or a point-to-multipoint
(PtMP) satellite network. This functionality is configured in the menu item <Intf: Send WAN Mode>
for the transmit modem section and <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode> for the receive modem section.

NOTE: The E7 allows for over the satellite interoperability with some legacy Datum modems by
setting the menu item <Intf: Send WAN Protocol = M500 HDLC> and <Intf: Rcv WAN
Protocol = M500 HDLC>. The default mode is <Intf: Send WAN Protocol = M7 HDLC>
and <Intf: Rcv WAN Protocol = M7 HDLC> for operation in a network that has all M7
modems installed.

Configuration of the proper “WAN Mode” and “WAN Protocol” will automatically set the proper MAC
learning and packet forwarding to prevent duplicate MAC addresses and enable proper network
operation.

3.8.2.4.1. Point-to-Point (PtP) Satellite Network

Figure 3-45 shows a typical PtP satellite network that could be used for extending a local LAN and
Internet access to a single remote location.

Figure 3-45 - Point-to-Point Satellite Network

In the PtP example shown in Figure 3-45, the E7 configuration is very simple for the user. The menu
setting would be the same on the modems at both ends of the satellite link.

 <Intf: Send WAN Mode = Bridge PTP>

 <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode = Bridge PTP>

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-91

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.8.2.4.2. Point-to-Multipoint (PtMP) Satellite Network

Figure 3-46 shows a typical PtMP satellite network that could be used for extending a local LAN and
Internet access to multiple remote locations.

Figure 3-46 - Point-to-Multipoint Satellite Network

Configuration of the E7 interface in the hub M7s is critical to proper network operation. The physical
cable connections for a PtMP Hub and single remote example are shown in Figure 3-47.

4 Node MCPC HUB Remote Site Example

Upconverter/BUC Downconverter/LNB

BUC
LNB

RF Splitter

M7LD Dual-Demod
M7LD Dual-Demod
M7LT Terminal

Figure 3-47 – Four site PtMP Hub and one Remote site example

The E7 interface configuration in the Hub M7s must be configured based on the size of the network
and the physical position within the Hub cabling configuration.

The menu setting for the E7 interface in the hub M7 modulator would be:

 <Intf: Send WAN Mode = Hub Bridge PTMP>

 <Intf: I/O Port 1 Mode = Data I/O>
 <Intf: I/O Port 4 Mode = Dmd Input I/O>

The menu setting for the E7 interface in the hub M7 multi-demod #1 would be:

 <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode = Hub Bridge PTMP>

 <Intf: I/O Port 1 Mode = Dmd Output I/O>

3-92 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

The menu setting for the E7 interface in the hub M7 multi-demod #2 and #3 would be:

 <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode = Hub Bridge PTMP>

 <Intf: I/O Port 1 Mode = Dmd Output I/O>
 <Intf: I/O Port 4 Mode = Dmd Input I/O>

The menu setting for the E7 interface in the M7s at the distant end of the links would be:

 <Intf: Send WAN Mode = Remote Bridge PTMP>

 <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode = Remote Bridge PTMP>

The physical connections shown in Figure 3-47 are specific to this example and are dependent on the
number of sites in the network. This example is a very simple PtMP example and a more complex
network with more user ports and modems would require careful attention to the E7 interface
configuration within the hub M7s.

3.8.2.4.3. Mesh Satellite Network

Figure 3-48 shows a typical four (4) site MESH satellite network that could be used for connecting
multiple remote locations with a single satellite hop. In a PtMP network, multiple remote sites can be
connected but all of the traffic would need to transit the Hub location which would cause two (2)
satellite hops. Real time applications operate better with less delay and the difference between a
PtMP network double hop connection and a Mesh single hop connection can make the difference for
acceptable user experience. Site
2

Si
1

Site

te
te

3
Si

M7LT Terminal M7LT Terminal M7LT Terminal M7LT Terminal

M7LD Dual-Demod M7LD Dual-Demod M7LD Dual-Demod M7LD Dual-Demod

Figure 3-48 – Four site Mesh network example

Configuration of the hub M7s with E7 interface is critical to proper network operation. The physical
cable connections for a PtMP Hub and single remote example are shown in Figure 3-47.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-93

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

PLL LNB
20W BUC

TX 950-2150 MHz RF Divider

N-Type/50 Ohm/10MHz
M7LD Dual-Demod
RX 950-2150 MHz RX 950-2150 MHz
230 VAC BUC LNB Power 13/18 VDC
Power Supply SMA / 50 Ohm
N-Type/50 Ohm/10MHz

M7LT Remote Terminal M7LD Dual-Demod

10/100/1GbE Bridge
Demod Output
10/100/1GbE Bridge
IN/OUT PORT

Figure 3-49 – Configuration of a Mesh network site with a spare demodulator

The E7 interface configuration of the M7s at each remote site must be configured properly for the
network type and the size of the network.

The menu setting for the E7 interface in the M7 modulator and demodulator #1 would be:

 <Intf: Send WAN Mode = >

 <Intf: I/O Port 1 Mode = Data I/O>
 <Intf: I/O Port 4 Mode = Dmd Input I/O>
 <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode = >

The menu setting for the E7 interface in the M7 multi-demod #2 and #3 would be:

 <Intf: Rcv WAN Mode = >

 <Intf: I/O Port 4 Mode = Dmd Output I/O>

The physical connections shown in Figure 3 34 are specific to this example and are dependent on the
number of sites in the network. This example is a very simple Mesh network example and a more
complex network with more remote sites would require additional M7 hardware at each site and
careful attention to the E7 interface configuration on each M7.

3-94 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.8.2.5. Modem Control Channel (MCC)

The E7 interface provides an in-band management channel that allows communications over the
satellite link to the modem(s) at the distant end. Activation for read/write capability over the MCC is
set in menu item <Intf: MCC Mode = Full Access>. The default setting for the MCC mode is
“Disable” and limited access is set by “Read Only” configuration. The MCC addresses and bit rate
limits are set in menu items <Intf: MCC Send Address>, <Intf: MCC Rcv Address>, and <Intf:
MCC Send Rate Limit>.

3.8.2.6. Test Modes and Statistics

The E7 offers loopback modes for link verification prior to running live traffic or for troubleshooting.
Loop back of Ethernet traffic can cause considerable problems within a network but the E7 design
resolves all of these issues and allows proper loopback testing. Loopback functions are set in menu
item <Intf: Test Sat WAN Loopback > for over the satellite testing and menu item <Intf: Test Ter
WAN Loopback > for local interface checkout.

The E7 provides extensive live statistics of the link performance. Statistics on Packets per Second
(PPS) sent and received, number of data, MCC, and idle packets and Bytes sent and received, the
percentage of the link that contains data, MCC, or idle packets, and total packets sent and received.
There is also a count of the total errored packets and the packet error rate. These statistics are
displayed in the <Intf: Stats Send Data> and <Intf: Stats Rcv Data> menu items. The send and
receive statistic counters can be independently reset in any of the menu items by pressing the “Edit”
and then the “Enter” keys on the front panel.

NOTE: When the <Intf: Send WAN Protocol = M7 HDLC> Idle Packets are inserted into the send bit
stream, up to the WAN throughput data rate, when there are no valid packets of either Data
or MCC. No Idle packets will be inserted when the <Intf: Send WAN Protocol = M500
HDLC>.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-95

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.8.3. G7 – Dual G.703/E1 Interface

3.8.3.1. E1 Signal Structure
Each port of the Dual G.703/E1 interface operates at a nominal rate of 2.048Mbps and adds 3975 bits
of overhead (<0.2%) to the data rate transmitted via the modulator. This overhead is needed to allow
for independent operation of the two (2) G.703/E1 ports. This overhead is independent of any
additional overhead that is added as a result of the MCC or ESC channels baud rate.

When the G7 is the active interface, selection of the Data Rate Entry Mode in the Modulator and the
Demodulator is automatically set to Interface; <Mod: Data - Rate Entry Mode> = Interface, <Dmd:
Data - Rate Entry Mode> = Interface

3.8.3.2. E1 Line Coding

The basic E1 signal is coded using the Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or High-Density Bipolar 3
(HDB3). In AMI coding, “ones” are alternately transmitted as positive and negative pulses, whereas
“zeros” are transmitted as a zero voltage level. AMI is not used in most E1 transmissions because
synchronization loss will occur during long strings of data zeros. In HDB3 coding, a string of four
consecutive zeros is replaced with a substitute string of pulses containing an intentional bipolar
violation. The HDB3 code substitutions provide high pulse density so that the receiving equipment is
able to maintain synchronization with the received signal.

The G7 supports two E1 link line codes:

 AMI coding
 HDB3 coding.

3.8.3.3. Other Interface Specifications

 Balanced: 120 ohm impedance on a RJ48c (Port 1 and Port 2)
 Unbalanced: 75 ohm impedance using J23 and J24 for Port 1 and a connector adapter for Port 2.
 Jitter performance is in according to ITU G.823
3.8.3.4. Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal, and is used to maintain line signal synchronization in
case of loss of input signal. The G7 interface will provide an AIS on the receive data line if there is a
fault condition in the demodulator. There will also be an indication on the G7 interface if there is an
AIS condition received on the transmit data line.

3.9. Data Interface Clock Options

The active interface type will determine availability of the bit timing sources. When the Synchronous
Interface is selected as the active interface, the Modulator and the Demodulator each have four (4)
possible sources for bit rate timing. These clock sources may be used in various ways in a system
implementation to provide correct timing at a destination. The network configuration will determine the
requirements for bit rate timing in the modem.

The options for modulator bit timing (Section 0) and demodulator bit timing (section 0) are shown
below. Descriptions of two (2) typical network timing configurations are explained in Section 3.9.3 and
Section 3.9.4.

3-96 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.9.1. Modulator Bit Timing

When the modem is configured with any serial interface option, the modulator always outputs the
Send Timing signal on the baseband interface connector. In a typical network, this timing signal is
used to generate the bit timing for the transmission toward the satellite. This timing signal may be
selected from 1 of 4 sources:

1. Internal – locked to a 2.0 ppm Internal Reference. If bit rate timing requirements require a
better reference, the internal oscillator may be phase locked to an External Reference
applied at the rear panel (J1). Refer to Section 3.7.4 for details on how to activate the
External Reference.
2. RCV Clock – locked to the demodulator Receive Timing (i.e. Loop Timing)
3. External – locked to an external timing input at the bit rate on pins 9 and 21 of the overhead
channel interface connector J10. This option allows a station-derived standard clock rate to
be used to clock data out of the FIFO
4. Terminal Timing – locked to the Terminal Timing input (pins 24/11)

NOTE: Bit timing options for optional interfaces are discussed in the applicable interface appendix.

A simplified block diagram of the Modulator clock sources for a Synchronous Interface is shown in
Figure 3-50.

Send Data
From DATA
Interface

Send
Timing To CLOCK
Interface
Modulator

Terminal Terminal
Timing Timing
From
Interface

External Send Timing Input

(Rear Panel)

Modulator bit clock source is

selected from "Internal", "Terminal
External Internal Timing", "External" or "RCV
External
Reference Input Reference Bit Rate NCO Clock". The Send Timing is
(Rear Panel) Reference PLL
Oscillator always an output from the modem.

From
Receive
Clock

Transmit Clock Sources

Figure 3-50 – Modulator Clock Source Options

Optional Reed-Solomon Decoder

& IBS Multiplexer

Receive
Data To DATA OUT IN DATA
Interface
Receive FIFO
Demodulator
Buffer
Receive CLOCK
Timing To OUT IN
Interface
M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-97
External
FIFO Clock Demodulator RCV Demod output
From CLOCK clock is phase
Interface
Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Send Data
From DATA
3.9.2.
Interface Demodulator Timing
When Send the modem is configured with any serial interface option, the modem will always output receive
timing
Timing Tosynchronous with the receive data and is a source of the timing for
Interface
the local network.
CLOCK
ModulatorIf the
system requires a different timing standard then provisions are made to buffer the data in a
programmable FIFO buffer. The receive timing signal that is derived from the satellite is always used
to clock
Terminal the data into the FIFO buffer. TheTerminal
FIFO buffer output clock must be the same average rate as
theTiming
demodulator
From
receive timing otherwise a buffer over/under flow will occur. The FIFO buffer clock
Timing
output
Interfacemay be selected to 1 of 4 sources

1. RCV Clock – the demodulator receive timing (buffer bypass mode) Meaning that the input
External Send Timing Input
(Rear Panel)
and output clocks are the same, disabling the FIFO
Modulator bit clock source is
2. Mod Clock – uses the selected modulator data rate clock as the output clock
selected and requires
from "Internal", "Terminal
External that the modulator Internal
External and demodulator data rate be identical Timing", "External" or "RCV
Reference Input Reference Bit Rate NCO
3.Panel)Internal –Reference
(Rear PLL
an internally generated bit rate NCO locked to the 2.0 ppm
Oscillator
Clock". The Send
Internal Timing is
Reference. If
always an output from the modem.
bit rate timing requirements require a better reference, the internal oscillator may be phase
locked to an External Reference applied at the rear panel (J1). Refer to Section 3.7.4 for
details on how to activate the External Reference. From
Receive
4. External – an external clock at the bit rate applied on pins 9 and Clock21 of the overhead channel

interface connector J10. ThisTransmit

option allows a station-derived
Clock Sources standard clock rate to be used
to clock data out of the FIFO

A simplified block diagram representation of the demodulator clock sources are shown in Figure 3-51.

Optional Reed-Solomon Decoder

& IBS Multiplexer

Receive
Data To DATA OUT IN DATA
Interface
Receive FIFO
Demodulator
Buffer
Receive CLOCK
Timing To OUT IN
Interface

External
FIFO Clock Demodulator RCV Demod output
From CLOCK clock is phase
Interface locked to receive
From Modulator
bit timing bit timing

FIFO output clock selected from

Bit Rate NCO "RCV Clock", "Internal", "External"
"Internal" or "Mod Clock". Selection of "RCV
Clock" bypasses the FIFO buffer.

Receive Clock Sources

Figure 3-51 – Demodulator Clock Source Options

3-98 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.9.2.1. Demodulator Receive Data FIFO Operation

The modem has a built-in First-In First-Out (FIFO) buffer on the receive data channel that may be
enabled to compensate for cyclical variations in the receive data rate. Cyclical variations are most
often caused by the daily movement of the satellite in its position resulting in a varying distance from
earth station locations. This movement would cause the receive data rate to increase during a portion
of the day and decrease during other periods. This type of cyclic change is termed Doppler variation
and the buffer to absorb the variation is a Doppler Buffer. The setting of the FIFO buffer size will need
to accommodate these variations to prevent any data loss.

In certain network configuration typical in international Telco connections, there will be separate very
high stability clock standards that are not locked to each other. The FIFO at each end of the link will
be provided a local clock for the purpose of clocking the data out of the modem. A receive buffer used
to absorb this type of clock offset is referred to as a Plesiochronous buffer. This type of clock
difference is uni-directional and cumulative to the point that eventually there will be a FIFO buffer slip.
The severity of the disruption can be minimized by setting the buffer size in bits to multiples of the
frame size. For example if the total frame size is 512 bits and the buffer is set to a size of 1024 bits an
under or over-run would result in the frame flags remaining in the same location in the data stream.
Note that frames will still be errored by the under or over-run, but synchronization may not be lost. If a
superframe structure is used it is likely that synchronization will still be lost.

Other data rate variations between the transmitting and receiving stations which are not periodic, i.e.
do not average to zero, can be buffered by the FIFO, but will eventually result in lost data.

Refer to the discussion in Section 0 above for the selections available for clocking the data in and out
of the FIFO buffer.

The Receive FIFO operation can be set from the front panel or remote control, and consists of
selecting the <Intf: I/O - Rcv Clock Source> parameter to something other than “Dmd Rcv Clock”
and the <Intf: I/O - Rcv Buffer Delay> parameter to the desired delay in milliseconds. The processor
computes the <Intf: I/O - Rcv Buffer Size> parameter to the size of the FIFO in bits based on the
current data rate.

The modem processor also can display the current FIFO fill percentage status. The FIFO sets the
delay or number of bits selected upon activation and this center value represents 100% FIFO fill. At
any time the FIFO may contain from 0% to 200% of the set value. The percentage fill can also
represent the percentage of delay with respect to the setting. For example if the buffer was set to 2
mS of delay and the fill is 150% this represents 3 mS of delay.

When the data rate is changed the modem maintains delay time constant, automatically changing the
number of bits stored in the buffer to compensate.

NOTE: When the number of bits of delay are very small, one bit may represent a large percentage
change (e.g. if the delay is only 4 bits, each bit represents 25%). The delay may be set from 4
bits to 131,070 bits at any data rate, resulting in a delay ranging from 0.00081mS (4 bits at
4.92 Mbps) to over 42,000 mS (131,070 bits at 2400 bps).

An overrun occurs when a bit is clocked into the FIFO causing the fill to reach a full 200% of the
selected value. This causes flushing the upper half of the FIFO, restoring the fill to 100%, re-centering
the FIFO. The data flushed is lost and cannot be recovered.

An under-run occurs when the last bit is clocked out of the FIFO, emptying it. This also causes re-
centering of the FIFO by resetting the buffer pointers to the mid or 100% level, resending all the data
in the buffer. Both conditions result in a potential serious disruption of traffic.

When an under or over-run occurs an internal modem flag is set indicating that a re-center has
occurred. The front panel display shows “Slip” and FIFO fill data percentages read from the remote
port are negative numbers. This latched flag may be reset at the front panel or by writing to the
remote port FIFO parameter.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-99

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

The FIFO may also be re-centered at any time on command from either the front panel or via the
remote control. At the front panel the command is <Intf: Status - Rcv Buffer> and pressing the “1”
key, then "Enter" to confirm. Pressing the “0” key on this parameter will clear the “Slip Status”.

3.9.3. Master/Slave Network

In this network configuration, one station is considered the master (hub) and the other station(s) is
considered the slave (remote).

The master transmit timing is either an input to (External or Terminal timing) or output from (Internal)
the master station modulator. The slave station receive data clock maintains this synchronization
(RCV Clock). The receive data clock is used by the local network to generate the contra–directional
transmit timing (loop timing). If the slave local network requires timing from the modulator, RCV Clock
is selected for the modulator timing option. Alternatively, if the local network will derive timing from
the receive timing signal and return a timing clock synchronous with the transmit data, then Terminal
Timing would be selected for the modulator timing option.

3.9.4. Master/Master
In this network configuration, both stations are considered a master. This would be required for any
connection between local networks that operate on their own network timing standard. This is typical
within Telco networks running G.703 as an interface at the modem.

At both ends of the satellite link, the transmit timing is typically derived from the incoming network
timing standard. In the case of G.703, this will be derived from the data signal but in the case of a
serial interface, this can either an input to (External or Terminal timing) or output from (Internal) the
modulator.

At both ends of the satellite link, the recovered receive timing signal is used to input the data into the
FIFO Buffer. The FIFO buffer output clock is selected from a source that contains the local network
timing signal. This is typically the set to Mod Clock which has derived the network timing from the
local network.

NOTE: In a Master/Master network, there is expected to be a FIFO buffer slip at some point in time.
The time between FIFO buffer slips is determined by the time base offset between the two (2)
master clocks and the size of the FIFO buffer. When this slip occurs, there will be a loss of
data equivalent to approximately one half the size of the FIFO buffer.

3-100 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.10. Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Operation

The modem has built-in logic for Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC). There are three (3)
operating modes available: Point-to-Point, Local, and Point-to-Multipoint.

NOTE: The examples following will assume the modems at all ends of the satellite links are
configured with the M7 Express Ethernet Interface (E7).

 The Point-to-Point mode is used to maintain constant Eb/No performance in a duplex Point-to-
Point (PtP) link by adjusting the transmit power at both ends of the links during changes in link
performance. This is especially useful when operating over a satellite at Ku-Band or Ka-Band
frequencies in locations with high rainfall periods.
 The Local mode is used in a broadcast or Point-to-Multipoint (PtMP) network where feedback
from remote ends of the link is not possible. In this mode, the transmit power of the broadcast
carrier is adjusted based on the Eb/No performance of the local receiver that is monitoring the
broadcast carrier.
 A third mode is used in Point-to-Multipoint (PtMP) when information from the hub demod is routed
through the outbound hub carrier to each of the remote sites in order to maintain a defined Eb/No
performance on each of the return links independently.

There must be safeguards built into any AUPC system to limit the automatic maximum and minimum
power output level changes. Other safeguard controls are built into the operating control software to
limit response times and detect adverse operating conditions.

The AUPC selection parameters and their descriptions are shown in Table 3-14.

Table 3-14 - AUPC Functions

Function Selection Criteria Description
Mod: IF AUPC Mode 0 = Disable, Automatic Uplink Power Control.
1 = Enable,
Mod: IF AUPC Eb/No 3.0 to 20.0 dB AUPC remote receive Eb/No level
set point.
Mod: IF AUPC Max Level +5.0 dBm to Minimum Max. Transmit level under AUPC
level control
Mod: IF AUPC Min Level Maximum level to Min. Transmit Level under AUPC
–35 dBm control

Demod: IF AUPC Send Path 0 = Disable, Sets the output path for the AUPC
1 = Local, data “Out MCC Port” setting at both
2 = Out MCC Port, ends of a duplex PtP link is the
3 = Out IP Control Port standard for bi-directional AUPC on
a duplex link. “Local” is the setting
for AUPC of the transmit carrier in a
broadcast network.
Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address 1 to 254. Set the address of the target MCC
255 = Global port

Intf: MCC Mode 0 = Disable Sets the rights of the MCC channel.
1 = Read Only
2 = Full Access
Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit Entered in kbps up to Sets the maximum rate the MCC
the maximum rate of channel will use from the satellite
the satellite data rate. channel. AUPC will require at least
0.5 kbps

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-101

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Function Selection Criteria Description

Intf: MCC Send Address 1 to 254. Sets the address of the Send MCC
255 = Global port
Intf: MCC Rcv Address 1 to 254. Sets the address of the Rcv MCC
255 = Global port

3.10.1. AUPC Remote Mode

The AUPC Remote function requires at least a 500 baud data channel between the sites in order to
operate. This data channel can either be external to the modem, provided by an external multiplexer,
a telephone line modem, or provided by the internal modem control channel (MCC) when enabled.
The normal method for setting up AUPC Remote over a PtP link is to use the built in MCC to provide
the necessary communications link.

NOTE: When using an interface other than an IP interface, the “Custom” or “Advanced” Multiplexer
mode MUST be selected to provide a channel for AUPC Remote operation from the IBS
multiplexer option.

Figure 3-52 shows a PtP link between Site 1 and Site 2 with both modems set to monitor the distant
end Eb/No performance and adjust the local transmit power to maintain a set Eb/No level.

Modem 1 Modem 2

Dmd Dmd
Intf IF AUPC Remote Path = Enabled IF AUPC Remote Path = Enabled Intf
MCC Send Address = 2 IF AUPC Remote MCC Address = 1 IF AUPC Remote MCC Address = 2 MCC Send Address = 1
MCC Rcv Address = 2 IF AUPC Remote Path = Out MCC Port IF AUPC Remote Path = Out MCC Port MCC Rcv Address = 1

Unit Mod Mod Unit

IF AUPC Mode = Enabled IF AUPC Mode = Enabled

Figure 3-52 – AUPC Remote Enabled Network

3.10.1.1. AUPC Remote Mode Setup Guide

Assume a working link between Site 1 and Site 2 without any active modem control channels or
AUPC enabled and a desired link performance of 7.0 dB Eb/No.

NOTE: AUPC Remote can be enabled in a single direction or in both directions as required. When
operating AUPC Remote in a single direction, the MCC must be enabled in only the direction
necessary to return Eb/No information to the controlled transmit modem.

3.10.1.1.1. Site 2 AUPC Setup

1. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
2. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher.
3. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “1” for
this example. The setting of this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must
match the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> setting of the modem at Site A.
4. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Out MCC Port”.
5. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> to “2” for this example. The setting of
this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must match the <Intf: MCC Send
Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameter settings of the modem at Site A.
6. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
7. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 7.0 dB.
8. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from

3-102 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.
9. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal
operating point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.

3.10.1.1.2. Site 1 AUPC Setup

1. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”. Please note that this will interrupt the
link from A to B until the B modem is set to the same settings.
2. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher.
3. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “2” for
this example. The setting of this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must
match the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> setting of the modem at Site A.
4. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Out MCC Port”.
5. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> to “1” for this example. The setting of
this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must match the <Intf: MCC Send
Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameter settings of the modem at Site B.
6. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
7. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 7.0 dB.
8. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.
9. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal
operating point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.

The PtP link should now be operating and using bidirectional AUPC that will adjust both transmit
output power levels in order to keep the distant end receive Eb/No constant. Alarms will be generated
if the transmit level reaches either the max or min level attempting to maintain proper receive Eb/No.

The exact settings required can be further adjusted to account for the type of fading expected. For
example if in a tropical environment with sudden heavy showers you may want to allow more power
margin.

3.10.2. AUPC Local Mode

In AUPC Local operation no external or mux overhead Eb/No return channel is required. However,
the modem at the broadcast transmit site must be a full duplex modem and the demodulator must be
set up to receive the broadcast carrier from the satellite.

Local AUPC must consider some potential sources for error in the operation of a local only AUPC
function:

1. The demodulator providing the Eb/No reference is at the same location of the modulator,
which will cause a ‘double’ fade when there is a fading event on the broadcast site.
2. The fade on the transmit carrier will be slightly different than the fade on the received carrier
at the same site due to the different satellite frequencies.
3. The antenna sizes in a broadcast network will typically have significant differences between
the transmit site and any of the receive sites. This antenna size difference will cause a
difference in the absolute Eb/No readings from the demodulators. The accuracy of the Eb/No
reading may be different at the higher Eb/No readings, i.e. >10dB, when compared to the
lower Eb/No readings, i.e. <7dB.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-103

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.10.2.1. AUPC Local Mode Setup Guide

Assume a working link between A and any number of sites (N) without any multiplexers or AUPC
enabled and an minimum operating link performance at the remotes of 7.0 dB Eb/No. The AUPC
Local setup simply requires setting up the AUPC parameters in the Site A transmitting modem (the
Hub). No changes are required at any of the remote sites

Figure 3-53 shows a PtMP hub modulator with the optional AUPC demodulator installed that will
monitor the local transmit carrier Eb/No performance and adjust the local transmit power to maintain a
set Eb/No level.

te llite
Hub Modulator om Sa
arrier fr
cast C
P1 E7 Intf Dmd (option for AUPC) Broad
P2 Eth MCC Send Address = 0 IF AUPC Remote Path =
P3 I/O Local
MCC Rcv Address = 0
P4
rier
P5
t Car
cas
Br oad
Mod
Unit
IF AUPC Mode = Enabled
IP Control Address = 192.168.1.100

Figure 3-53 – Hub Modulator with optional AUPC Demodulator

3.10.2.1.1. Site A AUPC Local Setup

1. Determine the current receive Eb/No at a sampling of the remote sites during clear sky
condition.
2. Read Site A Eb/No.
3. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Mode> parameter to “Enabled.
4. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> parameter to that desired value, e.g. 9.0 dB.
5. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin.
6. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal
operating point for margin.
7. Set the <Demod: IF - AUPC Send Path> parameter to “Local”.

The link should now be operating and using AUPC to set the A hub transmit level keeping its own
receive Eb/No constant and therefore the (N) remote sites receive Eb/No almost constant. Alarms will
be generated if the transmit level reaches either the max or min level attempting to maintain the
receive E/b/No.

3-104 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.10.3. AUPC Point-to-Multipoint Mode

The AUPC PtMP function requires at least a 500 baud data channel between the hub site and each
remote site in order to operate. This data channel will be an in-band channel in the outbound carrier
and in each of the inbound carriers from the remote sites. The normal method for setting up AUPC
PtMP link is to use the built in MCC to provide the necessary communications link.

NOTE: AUPC PtMP requires the use of the E7 interface in the M7 modems within the PtMP network.

Remote Modem 1

Dmd Intf
Hub Modulator IF AUPC Remote Path = MCC Send Address = 1
Dmd (option for AUPC) Disabled MCC Rcv Address = 1
P1 Intf
P2
E7 IF AUPC Remote Path =
MCC Send Address = 0
P3 Eth MCC Rcv Address = 0 Local
P4 I/O
P5
Mod Unit
IF AUPC Mode = Enabled
Unit Mod

IP Control Address = IF AUPC Mode = Enabled

192.168.1.100 Remote Modem 2

Dmd Intf
IF AUPC Remote Path = MCC Send Address = 2
Disabled MCC Rcv Address = 2
Hub Dual Demod A
Dmd 1
P1 Intf
P2 E7 MCC Rcv 1 Address = 0 IF AUPC Remote Path
P3 Eth MCC Rcv 2 Address = 0 = Out IP Port Mod
P4 IF Remote MCC Address Unit
I/O IF AUPC Mode = Enabled
P5 =1
AUPC Path
for Remote Unit Dmd 2
Outbound IF AUPC Remote Path Remote Modem 3
IP Control Address = 192.168.1.101
Control = Out IP Port
AUPC Packet
IP Control M&C Port Number = 9101 Dmd Intf
IP Control M&C Rmt Path IF Remote
PathMCC Address
=2 IF AUPC Remote Path = MCC Send Address = 3
= 192.168.1.100
Disabled MCC Rcv Address = 3

Hub Dual Demod B

Dmd 1 Mod
P1 Intf Unit
P2 E7 IF AUPC Remote Path IF AUPC Mode = Enabled
MCC Rcv 1 Address = 0
P3 Eth = Out IP Port
MCC Rcv 2 Address = 0
P4 I/O IF Remote MCC Address
P5 =3 Remote Modem 4
Unit Dmd 2 Dmd Intf
IF AUPC Remote Path IF AUPC Remote Path = MCC Send Address = 4
IP Control Address = 192.168.1.102 = Out IP Port
IP Control M&C Port Number = 9101 AUPC Packet Disabled MCC Rcv Address = 4
IP Control M&C Rmt Path
IF Remote
PathMCC Address
= 192.168.1.100 =4

Mod Unit
IF AUPC Mode = Enabled

Figure 3-54 – Point-to-Multipoint AUPC configuration for a four (4) site network

3.10.3.1. AUPC PtMP Mode Setup Guide

Assume a working link between A and any number of sites (N) without any multiplexers or AUPC
enabled and an minimum operating link performance from the remotes of 7.0 dB Eb/No. The AUPC
PtMP setup requires setting up the AUPC parameters in the Hub (Site A) modulator and each
demodulator and setting of the appropriate configuration of each remote site that AUPC is desired.

Figure 3-54 shows a PtMP link between a Hub (Sites A) and four (4) sites numbered Remote 1 – 4.
At the Hub, there is a single outbound carrier that is received by all of the remote sites and a
designated demodulator set to receive the inbound carrier from each remote site. When AUPC PtMP
mode is configured, the specific demodulator at the hub will monitor the Eb/No performance and send
the information to the local Hub modulator. The Hub modulator will transmit this information to the
specific remote site for transmit power adjustment to maintain the set Eb/No level for the link.

NOTE: The configuration settings in this section are specific to the configuration shown in Figure
3-54. The actual network configuration may be different and will require different settings of the MCC
Send and Rcv addresses at the remote sites and Remote MCC addresses at the Hub site.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-105

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.10.3.1.1. HUB (Site A) Modulator AUPC PtMP Setup

1. Take note of the <Unit: IP Control Address> parameter as it will be required later in the
setup of the hub dual demodulators.
2. Set the <Unit: IP Control M&C Port Number> parameter to 9101.
3. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
5. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher. This rate is
determined by the number of remote sites in the network and the recommended rate is to
have 0.500 kbps per remote site.
6. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “10” for
this example. This address is set per network requirements and all units at the hub must have
a different MCC address.
NOTE: Steps 7 – 10 are settings for enabling and using the optional AUPC Local mode that can
operate independently at the Hub location.

7. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Local”.

8. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 9.0 dB.
9. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.
10. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal operating
point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.
3.10.3.1.2. HUB (Site A) Dual Demodulator A AUPC PtMP Setup
1. Set the <Unit: IP Control Address> parameter to be in the same subnet at the Hub
modulator but not the same address as any other unit connected to the LAN.
2. Set the <Unit: IP Control M&C Port Number> parameter to 9101. Port 9101 is the default
port and this can be set per network requirements BUT all units in the AUPC PtMP
configuration MUST be set to the same port number.
3. Set the <Unit: IP Control M&C Rmt Path> address parameter to match the Hub Modulator
<Unit: IP Control Address> parameter.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
5. Set the <Intf: MCC Rcv 1 Address> parameters to “11” and <Intf: MCC Rcv 2 Address>
parameters to “12” for this example. This address is set per network requirements and all
units at the hub must have a different MCC address.
HUB (Site A) Dual Demodulator A; Demod 1 AUPC PtMP Setup
6. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Out IP Port”.
7. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> to “1” for this example. The setting of
this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must match the <Intf: MCC Send
Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameter settings of the modem at the specific
remote site transmitter that is being received by Dual Demodulator A; Demod 1.
HUB (Site A) Dual Demodulator A; Demod 2 AUPC PtMP Setup
8. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Out IP Port”.
9. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> to “2” for this example. The setting of
this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must match the <Intf: MCC Send
Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameter settings of the modem at the specific
remote site transmitter that is being received by Dual Demodulator A; Demod 2.
3.10.3.1.3. HUB (Site A) Dual Demodulator B AUPC PtMP Setup
1. Set the <Unit: IP Control Address> parameter to be in the same subnet at the Hub modulator
but not the same address as any other unit connected to the LAN.

3-106 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

2. Set the <Unit: IP Control M&C Port Number> parameter to 9101. Port 9101 is the default port
and this can be set per network requirements BUT all units in the AUPC PtMP configuration
MUST be set to the same port number.
3. Set the <Unit: IP Control M&C Rmt Path> parameter to match the Hub Modulator <Unit: IP
Control Address> parameter.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
5. Set the <Intf: MCC Rcv 1 Address> parameters to “13” and <Intf: MCC Rcv 2 Address>
parameters to “14” for this example. This address is set per network requirements and all
units at the hub must have a different MCC address.
HUB (Site A) Dual Demodulator B; Demod 1 AUPC PtMP Setup
6. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Out IP Port”.
7. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> to “3” for this example. The setting of
this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must match the <Intf: MCC Send
Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameter settings of the modem at the specific
remote site transmitter that is being received by Dual Demodulator A; Demod 3.
HUB (Site A) Dual Demodulator B; Demod 2 AUPC PtMP Setup
8. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Out IP Port”.
9. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address> to “4” for this example. The setting of
this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but must match the <Intf: MCC Send
Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameter settings of the modem at the specific
remote site transmitter that is being received by Dual Demodulator A; Demod 4.
3.10.3.1.4. Remote Site 1 AUPC PtMP Setup
1. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
1. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Disable”.
2. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
3. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “1” for
this example. The setting of this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but match
the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address>parameter settings of the Dual Demodulator
A; Demod 1.
5. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 7.0 dB.
6. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.
7. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal operating
point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.
3.10.3.1.5. Remote Site 2 AUPC PtMP Setup
1. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
2. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Disable”.
3. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher.
5. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “2” for
this example. The setting of this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but match
the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address>parameter settings of the Dual Demodulator
A; Demod 2.
6. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 7.0 dB.
7. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-107

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

8. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal operating
point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.
3.10.3.1.6. Remote Site 3 AUPC PtMP Setup
1. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
2. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Disable”.
3. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher.
5. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “3” for
this example. The setting of this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but match
the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address>parameter settings of the Dual Demodulator
B; Demod 1.
6. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 7.0 dB.
7. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.
8. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal operating
point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.
3.10.3.1.7. Remote Site 4 AUPC PtMP Setup
1. Set the <Mod: IF AUPC Mode> to “Enabled”.
2. Set the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote Path> to “Disable”.
3. Set the <Intf: MCC Mode> parameter to “Full Access”.
4. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Rate Limit> parameter to “0.500 kbps” or higher.
5. Set the <Intf: MCC Send Address> and <Intf: MCC Rcv Address> parameters to “4” for
this example. The setting of this address can be any address between 1 and 254 but match
the <Demod: IF AUPC Remote MCC Address>parameter settings of the Dual Demodulator
B; Demod 2.
6. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Eb/No> to the desired value, e.g. 7.0 dB.
7. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Max Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the maximum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
saturation but should be several dB above the nominal operating point for margin, e.g. -10.0
dBm.
8. Set the < Mod: IF - AUPC Min Level> parameter to the desired level. Determine the value
for this parameter by calculating the minimum power that is allowed to prevent the link from
dropping below the operating threshold but should be several dB below the nominal operating
point for margin, e.g. -15.0 dBm.

3-108 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.11. Special Control Mechanisms

The modem includes several special controls that were built in for specific customer systems, but are
available in the standard modem. These are not considered normal operation so care must be taken
if they are used.

 Power-Up Behavior
 Analog Monitor Output
 RTS Monitor

3.11.1. Power-Up Behavior

The modem can be set to always revert to the transmit carrier disabled on power-up. This might be
useful for example in mobile environments where the antenna may not be deployed or aligned on
each power-up cycle. Setting this option in the <Mod: IF - Mute> parameter to “Manual & Power
Loss“ allows such operation.

In other cases the user may require that the modem always revert to a specific configuration on
power-up. The normal behavior is for the modem to power-up with the last settings still in effect. One
of the options in the Unit Configuration column is <Unit: Config – Power-Up>. The default setting is
“Last” which performs as the normal described above. A user can select any of the stored
configurations to be recalled on each power-up cycle. This could be useful in a mobile environment or
a DAMA system where a control channel is desired on each power-up. In a large system, units can
be pre-set to a specific configuration during initial commissioning, but then easily changed to another
configuration for normal operation.

3.11.2. Analog Monitor Output Operation

The modem has a built-in function to output an analog voltage representing the current value of one
of three internal parameters by setting the <Unit: Monitor - Mode> parameter. The available
parameters that can be selected for this output are:

 Receive carrier level (Dmd CXR Level)

 Receive Eb/No (Dmd Eb/No)
 Transmit output power level (Mod CXR Level)

The analog output can be tailored to the user requirements through any of the control interfaces. The
output the processor allows control of the full scale voltage by setting the <Unit: Monitor – Full>
parameter to a range of +1.0 Volts to +10.0 Volts and the slope by setting the <Unit: Monitor –
Output Slope> parameter to positive or negative. These two settings control the output slope (gain
and direction) of this analog output voltage.

To illustrate consider the example of using the Receive carrier level for the monitor output to
automatic antenna positioning equipment. For this example, the modem has a carrier input range of
–20 to –60 dBm.

If the antenna auto-track controller requires a positive slope between 0 and +10 Volts, where +10
Volts represents the maximum received signal level, set the <Unit: Monitor – Full> parameter to
“+10.0” and the <Unit: Monitor – Output Slope> parameter to “Negative”. These settings have the
effect of inverting the slope of the AGC signal and setting the gain of the voltage to match the input to
the antenna controller.

NOTE: The output voltage is always a positive voltage.

The analog output presented at pints 5 (+voltage) and 6 (gnd) on the rear panel Alarms connector
(J6). The voltage pin has a1kΩ output impedance, protecting the driver circuitry from shorts.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-109

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

3.11.3. Analog Monitor Input Operation

The modem allows for an analog voltage input at pins 4 (voltage) and 6 (gnd) on connector the rear
panel Alarms connector (J6) to control alarms indications and/or the transmit carrier. The analog
input signal can be set to control the following functions:

 Do nothing
 Set Alarm A
 Set Alarm B
 Set Alarm A & B
 Mute transmit carrier
 Mute transmit carrier & Set Alarm A
 Mute transmit carrier & Set Alarm B
 Mute transmit carrier & Set Alarm A & B

The <Unit: Monitor – Input Threshold> parameter sets the threshold trigger for the analog input
signal and the <Unit: Monitor – Input Sense> parameter sets whether the analog input is active high
or active low. The <Unit: Test – Monitor Input> parameter is a real time monitor of the voltage at
the analog input. Use the <Unit: Alarm - Monitor Input Mask> parameter to set the action to be
taken by the analog input signal.

3.11.4. RTS Monitor and Output

The modem allows configuration of the Data Interface RTS status onto either the A or B Alarm relay
output on the rear panel Alarms connector J6. Since these relays are Form C, either logic direction
can be chosen for the output to use in controlling other equipment. Control of this feature is <Intf: I/O
– RTS Monitor>. This feature is independent of the <Intf: I/O – RTS> parameter which can be used
to control the Carrier enable via the RTS status.

 CAUTION!: Setting this to either Alarm A or B relay will override any other settings going to that
alarm relay.

NOTE: It is the responsibility of the user to set alarms properly when using this unique feature. This
relay control is not de-bounced with a time delay, therefore a fast changing or chattering RTS
signal will cause the relay to chatter.

3.12. Storing and Recalling Configuration

The modem has a built-in function allowing the operator to store the current complete configuration in
one of 99 numbered locations by setting the <Unit: Config - Store> parameter to “1” to “99”

Any stored configuration can then be recalled, including one permanent configuration called “Factory”
which is a set of default configurations by setting the <Unit: Config - Recall> parameter to “Factory”
or “1” to “99”

3.12.1. Automatic Configuration Recovery (ACR)

The modem allows any of the 99 configurations can be set to be automatically recalled in the event of
receive carrier loss after a specified number of seconds. To activate this feature, set the <Unit:
Config – Auto Restore> parameter to “Enable”. Set the time delay before restoring the configuration
in the <Unit: Config – Restore After> parameter and the configuration that is to be restored in the
<Unit: Config – Restore #> parameter.

NOTE: ACR is also commonly used to disable the transmit off after loss of receive carrier.

NOTE: The ACR is not available when the modem is operating in a redundancy mode.

3.13. Burst Mode Operation

NOTE: Burst mode is a special factory request option and not installed in standard modems.

3-110 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

The modulator burst mode is controlled by the interface RTS/CTS and data flag signals. The
sequence of events for the burst mode is as follows:

1. The RTS from the DTE device is normally active. The idle character from the DTE is a
continuous Mark condition. The modulator output carrier is off in this idle state.
2. The modulator responds to the DTE device when ready to transmit by activating the CTS
signal.
3. Any time after the CTS is received by the DTE, the DTE starts transmitting flags and/or data.
The first non–SDLC/HDLC flag character received by the modulator is the start of
transmission signal, causing the modem to generate a preamble and initiate the “Carrier ON”
command. Transmission continues with data bytes placed after the preamble.
4. The next SDLC/HDLC flag received by the modulator is the end of transmission signal.
5. When the closing flag is detected by the modulator, it drops the CTS indicating that a new
data message cannot be started. When the last data bit is sent, the modulator will reassert
the CTS signal, and turn the carrier OFF.

3.14. Built-in 1:1 Redundancy Mode Operation (Future Option)

The modem has a built-in 1:1 redundancy mode that allows two modems to be connected together
sharing connections, but with only one unit “on-line”. The built-in software provides automatic back-up
protection should the on-line unit indicate a failure by switching to a functioning off-line unit.

NOTE: The two modems must be the same model number and type, and should be at the same
firmware revision for proper redundant operation.

A diagram of the connections required for 1:1 redundancy is shown in the Figure 3-55 below.

Station IF
Data "Y" Cable Paired Modems
Equipment

Xm t IF

Transm it
Modem A IF
Com biner

Aux Xm t
Rcv IF
Aux Rcv

Aux Xm t

Aux Rcv Xm t IF

Receive IF
Modem B
Splitter

Rcv IF

Figure 3-55 – M7 Connections for 1:1 Redundancy

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-111

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

NOTE: It is important in L-Band systems to use special splitters and combiners that have the ability
to pass DC used to power the BUC and LNB with sufficient current capacity.

3.14.1. Set-Up Procedure for 1:1 Redundancy (Future Option)

If redundancy mode is to be set up between a pair of modems then the following procedure is
followed during installation and setup:
1. Physically install both units to be paired and connect the IF transmit and receive coaxial
cables, special data “Y” cable, and Auxiliary cable connection on both units. For
convenience we will arbitrarily call one modem “Primary” and the other “Secondary”.
2. Power-up and configure the primary modem completely for the intended operating
parameters, including setting the <Unit: Redundancy – Mode> parameter to “1:1”. This
initial unit should not be in alarm.
3. Turn the power on the secondary unit on.
4. Go to the primary unit menu item <Unit: Redundancy – Config> and press the “Edit” key.
The on-line unit will ask permission to transfer configuration to the second unit with the
prompt “Config Backup?” Confirm by pressing “Enter”. The primary unit should say “Sending
Config” for approximately 1 second. If the transfer of any packet results in an error, a “Send
Fail” message will be displayed, but transfer will continue.
5. Verify that the units are functioning correctly in redundancy mode. Go to the <Unit: Status –
Redundancy> item in both units. The on-line unit will say “On-Line, Bckup OK” while the off-
line unit will say “Standby, OK”.

Physical installation of the two units is best accomplished with one unit directly beside or above the
other in the rack. This allows the status of the two modems to be seen together and avoids confusion.
 CAUTION!: Care should be taken that both units are not turned on in a non-redundant
configuration with the “Y” data cable installed. This will result in the two unit’s data
output drivers possibly conflicting and causing damage.

During configuration of the primary unit several new parameters will become available after the mode
is set to 1:1. In addition to the <Unit: Redundancy - Config> parameter of step 4 above there will
also be parameters that allow the alarms and timing to be configured for the application. The default
values for these parameters are probably good in most installations, but they may require specific
configuration, especially if the unit had been configured for another unique application. These new
parameters are:

 <Unit: Redundancy – Sw Rqst> - This parameter allows you to determine which alarm
indications result in a switch request. The possible selections are “On Minor Or Major” or “On
Major Alarm”.
 <Unit: Redundancy – Sw Hold> - This parameter determines how long an alarm must exist on
the on-line unit and not the off-line unit before switching will occur. Allowable values are 0.0 to
600.0 seconds. The value could be set to zero, but this is not advised. A nominal value of 0.5
seconds insures that intermittent cases do not cause undue switching. A built in factor of 10
seconds is provided once a switch has occurred before a switch back to the original unit is
allowed (except in the case of a manual switch request or loss of power in the on-line unit which
requires 2 seconds).

3.14.2. Teardown Procedure for 1:1 Redundancy

Teardown or un-pairing of two redundant units is accomplished by turning both units off before
removing the “Y” cable. Then power on each unit and set the <Unit: Redundancy – Mode> to
“Disabled”.

3-112 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

3.14.3. Operating 1:1 Redundancy Mode

Operation of a redundant pair of modems consists mainly of determining the status of units and
forcing transfer of operation from one unit to the other.

A quick status to determine which modem is currently on ”On-Line” and the failure state of the paired
modems is done by viewing the LED indicators on the front panels. In a fully operating set-up there
will be no alarms on either unit, but one modem will have the green Modulator Transmit LED
illuminated and the other will have the transmit LED extinguished. The other LED indicators still show
the relevant condition of the Modulator, Demodulator and Unit. A more thorough status condition is
viewed by setting both modems to the <Unit: Status – Redundancy> parameter.

The unit currently On-Line will present its status on the lower line of the LCD display as “Online –
xxxxx” where xxxxx could be one of several messages:

 Bckup OK – The backup modem is not faulted

 BCKUP ALM – The backup modem is in an alarm state
 NO BCKUP – No backup modem was found via the aux communications channel

The unit currently Off-Line will present its status on the lower line of the LCD display as one of two
messages:

 Standby OK – The offline modem is not faulted

 OFFLINE – ALARM - The offline modem is in an alarm state

3.14.3.1. Manual Transfer Switch in 1:1 Redundancy Mode

The 1:1 transfer process of forcing the two paired modems to swap their on-line/off-line status is a
one step process. The procedure however can only be accomplished on the unit that is currently “On-
Line”.

 On the currently “On-Line” unit go to the<Unit: Status – Redundancy> parameter and press the
“Edit” key.
 The LCD display will present the message “Enter to Xsfer?”. Pressing the “enter key will cause
the unit to go off-line and the currently “Off-Line” backup unit to go “On-Line”.

NOTE: If there is no backup unit or the backup unit is in alarm then the transfer will not be completed
and an error message is displayed.

3.14.4. Removal and Replacement of Units in Redundancy Mode

It may be necessary to remove a unit of a redundant pair and replace that unit with another. The
following process performs that function with the minimum disruption to the traffic status.

1. Manually transfer the unit (if it is currently on-line) to the off-line position
2. Remove power from the off-line unit
3. Disconnection of cables from the off-line unit
4. Physical removal of the unit.
Replacement is the reverse of this procedure.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 3-113

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

4.0 Maintenance

4.1. Periodic Maintenance

The modem requires no mandatory periodic field maintenance procedures. The unit contains no
required periodic adjustments and the digital calibration data is held in EEPROM. Should a unit be
suspected of a defect in field operations after all interface signals are verified the proper procedure is
to replace the unit with another known working modem. If this does not cure the problem, other
equipment in the link, wiring or power should be suspect. There are no batteries or parts requiring
periodic service contained within the case. The only moving part is the internal fan, which is designed
for a service life in excess of 200,000 hours.There is no external fuse on the M7 Modem. The fuse is
located on the power supply assembly inside the case, and replacement is not intended in the field.

4.1.1. Internal Reference Calibration

During factory testing and calibration the modem unit is compared to a known in-house reference and
calibrated. A default value is permanently stored representing this factory calibration. The unit may be
offset from this factory value by using the manual tuning or automatic recalibration.

Manual tuning of the modem’s reference is accomplished using the <Unit: Ref – Fine Tune>
parameter and entering a value from –127 to +127

Automatic calibration of the modem’s internal reference is accomplished by inserting a known high
accuracy reference at the rear panel “External Reference” input and enabling the <Unit: Test – Cal
Ref> item. The calibration should take several seconds and will indicate a successful completion. If
the calibration fails then the external reference was out of range in either level or frequency.

 CAUTION!: The Reference Calibration procedure may result in lost traffic during performance of
the calibration! The calibration should not be performed in operating links without
prior arrangements.

The factory calibration may be restored by setting the <Unit: Ref – Fine Tune> value to “0”.

4.2. Modem Checkout

The following descriptions assume that the full system is in operation and that software is running
properly on the central processor.

4.2.1. Initial Power-Up

 CAUTION!: Before initial power-up of the modem, it recommended to disconnect the transmit
output from the operating satellite ground station equipment. This is especially true if
the current modem configuration settings are unknown, where incorrect setting could
disrupt existing communications traffic. New modems from the factory are normally
shipped in a default configuration which includes setting the transmit carrier off.

The modem does not have a power switch so turning the unit “ON” is done by connecting the DC
power to the DC input connector J2. At every power-up, the modem processor tests itself and several
of its components before beginning its main monitor/control program. These power-up diagnostics
take approximately 1 second and show no results if successful. If a failure is detected, the indications
vary by the type of fault detected. A serious failure will result in the front panel Alarm LEDs flashing at
a rate of approximately 4 times a second, and the unit beeper sounding.

Most potential failures will result in the modem giving an description of the problem on the front panel
LCD display. Status indications are shown highest priority first.

The initial field checkout of the modem can be accomplished from the front panel or in the Terminal
Mode. The Terminal Mode has the advantage of providing full screen access to all of the modem’s
parameters, but requires a separate VT100 terminal or computer running a terminal program in
VT100 or ANSI mode.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-1

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

4.2.2. Factory Default Parameters

New modems from the factory have default values placed into the non-volatile memory for operating
parameters. If a Monitor/Control System does not configure the modem automatically via remote
control, the modem can be easily configured from the front panel or through the HTTP interface using
a standard internet browser. To restore the factory default parameters the modem can be powered on
while depressing the “Clear” key. A modem can be returned to the factory default settings by using
the front panel command <Unit: Config - Recall>, then editing (or quick edit) and choosing the
“Factory” or “0” selection option.

The most common factory default parameters placed into the non-volatile memory are shown in Table
4-1.

Table 4-1 – Factory Default Parameters

Modulator: Demodulator:
Carrier Frequency = 70.00 MHz Carrier Frequency = 70.00 MHz
Data Rate = 256 kbps Data Rate = 256 kbps
Modulation = QPSK Modulation = QPSK
Code Rate = Rate 1/2 Code Rate = Rate 1/2
Differential Encoder = Enabled Differential Decoder = Enabled
Scrambler = Auto Descrambler = Auto
Clock phase = Normal Clock phase = Normal
Data = Normal Data = Normal
Clock Source = Internal Clock Source = Receive
RTS = Ignore Sweep mode = Fast
Carrier = Off. Acquisition Range = +/- 30 kHz
All Mod Alarms to Relay A All Demod Alarms to Relay B

Modem Unit: Synchronous Serial Interface (if installed):

Modem Reference: Internal, 10 MHz Mode = RS-449
Remote Port Address = 1 All Tests Off
Remote Port = RS-232 Data and Clocks in normal mode (not
Remote Mode = Binary Packet inverted). The XMT Clock now uses a
Remote Rate = 9.6 kbps default “Auto” mode that detects the
Remote Data Format = 8 data bits, 1 stop, proper phasing and applies it.
no parity

4.2.3. Lamp-Test Mode

The modem provides a built–in Lamp-test mode which momentarily lights the display and the LED
indicators to verify they are functioning.

Access the “Lamp Test” Mode from the front panel parameter <Unit: Test - Modem>. Press “Edit” to
select the “Lamp Test” and press “Enter” to start the modem self-test.

4-2 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

4.3. Internal Modem Test Functions

When a modem is first installed and placed in service it is common to run several tests to verify
proper performance of each of the equipment items in the link. The modem is designed to aid in this
process by providing built in test modes geared to verifying performance, and isolating potential
problems. These aids consist of multiple Loop-Back modes and the built-in Bit Error Rate Tester
(BERT). These facilities are also useful when troubleshooting system or link problems which involve
the modem.

 CAUTION!: All of the modem testing functions described below will result in loss of traffic. They
should not be used in operating links without prior arrangements.

4.3.1. Loopback Testing

The Loopback modes are typically used in a wired link with DTE equipment that can transmit and
verify receipt or preferably a Bit Error Rate Test Set (BERT). The basic procedure used is to transmit
a data signal at one end of the link and sequentially set each of the loop-back options. Proper
reception of the loop-back data verifies all components between the source and the loop.

The simplified diagram below shown in Figure 4-1 show the location of the modem’s built in loopback
functions. The advantage to having these functions built-in is that they are electronically
programmable without having to disconnect existing cabling to connect equipment that must be
available for testing.

Each of these loopback modes are individually programmable at the modem front panel or remote
control interface. More detail on each of the typical loopback uses is given below.

Near End Internal

IF Loopback BERT

Remote Modem Local Modem

DTE
or
BERT

Satellite Near End Terrestrial

Link Data Loopback

Far End Satellite Near End Satellite

Data Loopback Data Loopback

Figure 4-1 – Loopback Block Diagram

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-3

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

4.3.1.1. Near End Terrestrial Data Loopback:

The near end terrestrial data loopback will be the closest loopback to the input data connection of the
modem. If data is returned and received properly this loopback will indicate the DTE wiring and
connection to the modem are correct. This loopback is set in <Intf: Test - Ter Loopback>.

NOTE: This test requires an external source of data.

4.3.1.2. Near End Satellite Data Loop-Back

The near end satellite data loopback test is used to return the data that was received over a proper
satellite link back over the satellite to be received at the other end of the link. This loopback tests the
complete satellite link and the modems at both ends of the link. This loopback is set in <Intf: Test -
Sat Loopback>.

NOTE: This is a uni-directional loopback and no data will be returned to the terrestrial side of the
modem.

4.3.1.3. Near End IF Loop-Back:

This loop-back test will verify the modem transmit data signal processing, modulation, demodulation,
receive signal processing, and connection to the receive interface. This loopback is set in IF loop-
back in <Dem: Test - IF Loopback>.

4.3.1.4. Far End Satellite Data Loop-Back:

This loopback will test most of the satellite link as well as the functions checked in paragraph 4.3.1.3
above. The signal is sent over the satellite (or test setup) and is looped back at the satellite side of
the data interface on the far end modem. This tests both modems, the satellite link and originating
end wiring. The M7 sets the satellite side loop-back in <Intf: Test - Sat Loopback>.

NOTE: In this test, the near end satellite and IF loop-back functions should not be enabled whether
using the internal or an external BERT. Setting this mode slaves the modulator timing to the
demod timing and the FIFO buffer remains engaged if enabled.

In this type of testing an external BERT is typically set to provide a terminal timing output, while the
connected modem is set to use the terminal timing signal as the transmit bit rate clock source. This
modem can alternatively be set to use its internal clock for the transmit clock timing and provide that
signal to the BERT for synchronization. More information on using the M7’s internal BERT is given
below.

4-4 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

4.3.2. Built-in BERT

The modem contains a complete transmit and receive Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) function. Each
direction is independent and can be used for either loop-back testing or uni-directional testing with
another modem on the other end of the link. Since the internal test patterns are based on industry
standard test patterns it is possible to use the built in BERT with an external BERT or any brand of
modem at the other link end as long as the interoperability of the test patterns has been verified. The
IF Loop-back state and the BERT state are both stored in non-volatile memory, therefore if the unit is
powered off during IF loop-back and/or BERT test it will return to this state when powered up again.

 CAUTION!: Enabling the BER Test set will result in disruption of any traffic currently through the
M7 in the direction that is enabled. BER Tests should not be performed on a live
traffic unit.

The modem BERT can be “pointed” in two possible directions. The normal mode involves the BER
transmitting in the direction of the satellite and receiving from the satellite direction. Added in the M7
is an alternate mode which allows the BERT to transmit and receive toward the terrestrial data
interface side. The direction is controlled via the Interface <Intf: Test – BER I/O> parameter and can
be selected for either “Satellite” or “Terrestrial”. The Satellite direction looks to the modem as if a DTE
is sending and receiving data. The Terrestrial direction appears to the line as if a DCE device is
sending and receiving data.

The Modulator (Transmit) BERT is enabled at <Intf: Test – Send BER>, and the Demodulator
(Receive) BERT is enabled at <Intf: Test – Rcv BER >. With either transmit or receive being enabled
by choosing either the 2047 or 2^23-1 test pattern options. Both BERT setting should be the same to
operate properly.

When the Demodulator receive BER Test is enabled, there are seven (7) test status items shown in
the Interface Test column. These seven (7) items are:

1. BER – The ratio of errored bits to un-errored bits since the test began or was last reset.
Expressed in bits per bit as x.yyy E-power where the mantissa (x.yyy) is always between 0
and 10 and power is the power of 10. For example 1.200 E-6 is 1.2 errored bits in 10^6 bits,
or 1.2 errors per million bits. No errors are expressed as 0.000E-power. Since Errored bits
do not accumulate during a sync loss, it is possible to lose sync for several seconds and not
have the BER affected.
2. BER Sync Loss – The total number of sync losses that have occurred since the test began
or was last reset.
3. BER Errors – The total number of bit errors that have occurred since the test began or was
last reset. Errored bits do not accumulate during a sync loss.
4. BER Bits – The total number of bits that have been received since the test began or was last
reset.
5. BER EFS – Error Free Seconds. The percentage of the total number of seconds with no
errors occurring during that particular second. Compiled since the test began or was last
reset. No errors are shown as “100.00%”. Errored seconds accumulate during a sync loss.
6. BER Erred Sec – The total number of seconds with errors occurring during that particular
second, since the test began or was last reset. Errored seconds accumulate during a synch
loss
7. BER Total Sec – The total number of seconds since the test began or was last reset.

The test is reset or started over by viewing any of the 7 status items listed above and pressing the
“Edit” or “0” key, then responding to the prompt “Enter to Restart” by pressing “Enter”. A restart on
any items resets all items and values.

A single error may be inserted when the BER test is active to verify proper operation by using the
<Intf: Test – Send BER> parameter and pressing “3” and “Enter”. This could be useful since it is
sometimes difficult to see errors with the Turbo Product Codes FEC.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-5

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

In the loop-back diagram shown above, the BER test sets are physically between the satellite and
terrestrial loop-back functions. Thus data traversing through either of these loop-backs does not
involve the BER test sets, even if enabled. If the built-in BERT is being used the local “satellite loop-
back” function should not be enabled.

The transmit output from the built-in BERT always faces toward the modem’s transmit or satellite
side, while the receive comes from the modem’s receive side. It is not designed to transmit and
receive signals from the terrestrial side of the data connection.

All of these settings and test results are also available via the remote control interface, allowing for
automated and periodic testing of units not in service.

4.4. Troubleshooting
The following is a list of possible problems that could be caused by failures of the modem or improper
setup and configuration for the type of service. The list is arranged by possible symptoms exhibited
by the modem. When simple solutions yield no results then test equipment may be necessary to help
isolate the trouble. A spectrum analyzer and an external Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) function are
invaluable. The modem has a built in BERT function that can be used as a substitute for the external
BERT function.

In most cases the first attempt at isolating a problem suspected of being within the modem is to
substitute the suspect modem with known good equipment assuring the configuration parameters are
correct. If the configuration setting of the equipment is not the source of the problem, this method will
quickly eliminate items from the potential source list. The two drawbacks to this method are the
availability of extra equipment and the possibility of interaction between two or more equipment items.

4.4.1. Symptom: The Modem will not acquire the incoming carrier:
 Possible Cause: Improper receive input to modem.
 Action: Verify all receive cabling is correct.

 Possible Cause: Receive carrier level too low.

 Action: Verify all receive cabling is correct, that the down converter is properly set and that the
LNA is turned on. If a spectrum analyzer is available, locate and measure the receive level, which
should not be below –60 dBm absolute. At lower data rates the input level may be as low as –84
dBm.

 Possible Cause: Receive carrier frequency outside of acquisition range.

 Action: Check the receive acquisition range is adequate for the possible system offsets. Setting
the value to 30 kHz is a standard value encompassing all normal offsets. After acquisition, the
actual receive frequency can be read from the front panel.

 Possible Cause: Transmit carrier incompatible.

 Action: Check the receive parameter settings and ensure that they match those on the
modulator.

 Possible Cause: Modem is in test mode.

 Action: Check the modem front panel for yellow warning LEDs indicating a test mode is enabled.
Self-Test or IF Loop-back disconnects the Demodulator from the IF receive input connector.

 Possible Cause: Interference on the satellite.

 Action: The interference can take many forms. The most common are an adjacent large carrier,
antenna feed polarization off resulting in carrier interference in opposite polarization,
intermodulation products. Most of these cases can more easily be determined with a spectrum
analyzer. If possible move to another operating frequency to see if that resolves the problem.

4-6 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

4.4.2. Symptom: The Modem acquires a carrier but loses lock intermittently.
 Possible Cause: Receive acquisition range set too narrow. When the carrier drifts outside of the
acquisition range the demodulator loses lock until the carrier returns inside the acquisition range.
 Action: Check the actual receive carrier frequency and the receive offset at the front panel and
set the acquisition range appropriately.

 Possible Cause: Receive level varying out of AGC range.

 Action: Check the actual receive input level at the front panel. Change the carrier input level to
within the correct range. In Ku–Band systems, please note that rain fade can cause significant
receive level variance.

 Possible Cause: Transmit or Receive Converter equipment noisy.

 Action: The dependence up good phase noise in converter equipment is especially noticeable at
low data rates and when using QPSK modulation. Very low frequency phase noise on the
converter oscillators is very difficult to see or measure, but is detrimental to proper low data rate
performance. Substitution of another modem will verify the correct modem functioning.

4.4.3. Symptom: The Modem output data is corrupted.

 Possible Cause: Receive data or clock inverted.
 Action: Check the current state of the Demod Clock and Data Phase. Try inverting the phase.

 Possible Cause: Receive Carrier signal Eb/No is too low resulting in poor BER performance.
 Action: Ensure that the transmit end is properly set and that the receive subsystems are all
operating correctly. In a small station ensure that the antenna is “peaked” on the satellite. In a Ku-
Band station, intense rain can cause poor receive performance.

 Possible Cause: Transmit and Receive scrambler or differential encoder options do not match or
not enabled. Note – The differential encoder in the M7 is under processor control only, but this
cause could apply to a mixed system linked to another modem.
 Action: Check the current state of the Scrambler and differential encoder. In all operating
systems the differential encoder/decoder and one of the available scramblers must be enabled.

4.4.4. Symptom: The Modem receive FIFO buffer indicates “Slip”.

 Possible Cause: The FIFO automatically re-centers when an overrun or under-run condition
occurs.
 Action: Check that the proper clocking options are used and the FIFO buffer is set large enough
to handle the expected satellite Doppler shift over a 24 hour period. No amount of buffering will
correct for different clocks on the input and output of the FIFO.

4.4.5. Symptom: Receive DTE equipment indicates “clock slip” or “sync lost”.
 Possible Cause: The FIFO automatically re-centers when an overrun or under-run condition
occurs.
 Action: Check that the proper clocking options are used and the FIFO buffer is set large enough
to handle the expected satellite Doppler shift over a 24 hour period. No amount of buffering will
correct for different clocks on the input and output of the FIFO.

 Possible Cause: Receive signal or clock inverted.

 Action: Check the current state of the Demod Clock Phase. Try inverting the phase.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-7

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

4.5. Updating Modem Firmware

The M7 modem series system firmware is updated by reprograming the SD card. If the unit requires a
firmware update, contact Datum customer service to request the proper firmware for the specific unit
that requires update. The proper firmware will be available on the Datum FTP site for download.

There are two (2) ways to upgrade the firmware in the M7.

 The first is to replace the internal SD card with a new card that has the updated firmware.
 The second is to update the M7 firmware via the Web Browser interface.

4.5.1. Software Update using the Web Browser

The following information will provide a step by step process to update the M7 firmware using the
Web browser interface. Instructions on how to set up and communicate to the M7 via a web browser
are found in Section 0.

Before starting the update process access the Unit-Test tab and verify the installed firmware.

Installed and ‘Running’ firmware

Click “Browse” to locate the file

that was downloaded from the
Datum FTP site.

4-8 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Clicking on the “Browse” button

will open a dialog box to allow
navigation to the folder location
where the file that was saved
after it was downloaded from the
Datum FTP site.

Click “Update” to begin the

process to update the M7 firmware

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-9

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Status of the update will be shown

in four (4) screens. The first status
will show the process of uploading
the installation file into an internal
memory location.

The second status will show the

process of verification of the
installation file that was uploaded
into an internal memory location.

The third status will show the

process of extracting the contents
of the installation into internal flash
memory.

4-10 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

At the end of the extraction process,

the M7 will reboot. At this point, the
current browser session will
terminate and the “Login” page will
display. Reenter the login
credentials to verify the update
process was completed properly.

In the “Unit-Test” tab, the current

updated firmware will show in either
“Firmware Flash 1 or 2” and display
“Running” to indicate it is the
operating firmware. The previous
firmware will be maintained in the
other flash location and can be
called up if there is an issue with the
new update.

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-11

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

4.6. Upgrading the Modem Feature Set

Each of the modems in the M7 series is available currently with many different “Feature Sets”,
representing basic capabilities that suit it to certain tasks. They are currently given a feature set code
representing the elements of those features. Refer to section 1.7 which shows the capabilities of each
standard feature set.

Upgrading from one feature set to another is accomplished in the following manner.

Contact your local reseller or Datum Systems directly requesting an upgrade and noting the Unit
Serial Number, current version and the version to which you would like to upgrade to. Upon
purchasing an upgrade you will be provided with a special 20 digit code which is used to enable the
upgraded features. The code is unique to this unit’s serial number and will not work in any other
modem.

There are a couple of ways to insert the feature code into the M7.

4.6.1. Using the front panel menu

To insert the code go to the <Unit: Status - Feature> parameter using the front panel keypad. Then
enter the 20 digits of the given code directly using the digits on the keypad, then press the “Enter”
key. If correctly entered the modem will now display the new feature set and list the available
modulation modes above the standard set in the M705. For example when the M708 feature set is
enabled the <Unit: Status - Feature> parameter will display “M708-8PSK-16QAM”.

4.6.2. Using the web browser

To insert the code go to the “Feature” tab in the “Unit” page and enter the 20 digits of the given code
directly designated box, press the “Execute & Save” button. If correctly entered the modem will now
display the new feature set and list the available modulation modes above the standard set in the
M705. For example when the M708 feature set is enabled the <Unit: Status - Feature> parameter
will display “M708-8PSK-16QAM”.

Figure 4-2 – Unit Feature Page

Feature sets can only be upgraded. There is no code to downgrade a feature set to a lower one.

4-12 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

Figure 4-3 – Modulator Feature Page

Figure 4-4 – Demodulator Feature Page

Figure 4-5 – E7 Interface Feature Page

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-13

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

4.7. Frequently Asked Questions - FAQ

OR How Do I? Why Doesn’t It? and Where Is?
This section is intended to form a smart index pointing to proper sections of the manual with
information on performing common actions or answering common questions. The presentation here is
divided into 5 common areas – Link Setup, Front Panel, Remote Control, Data Interface and Manual.

4.7.1. Link Set Up and Installation.

4.7.1.1. Compatibility with other Modems.
4.7.1.1.1. How do I make the M7 talk to a “x” brand modem on the other end of a link?
The M7 has several new programmable features which should make this easier than ever. First,
where possible if both modems adhere to Intelsat IESS standards then those defined parameters
should be set the same. Still all modem manufacturers have their own conventions for setting
parameters with no specified standard, so for example some modems may have a different
modulation sense for data bits than others. This would make no difference between two modems of
the same type, but would invert data between modems of different types on each end of a link. Most
items of this type are programmable in the M7 modem.

The M7 also has a significant number of FEC compatibility modes for aid in achieving compatibility
with some competitive modems, especially in Turbo FEC modes. These modes are denoted by the
FEC Option type “CT” on the front panel selection.

4.7.1.1.2. Is Datum Systems' Turbo Product Codes compatible with that made by other
modem manufacturers?
The M7 also has a significant number of FEC compatibility modes for aid in achieving compatibility
with some competitive modems, especially in Turbo FEC modes. These modes are denoted by the
FEC Option “CT” on the front panel selection. These modes are typified by the modes used in the
CDM5xx and CDM6xx series of competitive modems.

There are several modes that are probably not compatible for several reasons. First is that
there is no standard for implementation of TPC. Second, Datum Systems spent a lot of time
and development in implementing a full set of TPC parameters (i.e. Rates 1/2, 3/4 and 7/8),
and insuring the absolute best performance with no compromises. We have seen no other
TPC implementation that even comes close to ours. Third, because we have many
customers that use our modems in systems requiring low latency we implemented an
alternate "Short Block" mode that reduces the typical TPC delay by approximately 1/3. The
techniques used in this TPC achieve the best performance of any modem currently produced.
Our latest TPC “Advanced” modes are also proprietary to Datum Systems, simply because
we know of no one else using the specific parameters.

4.7.1.1.3. Is the M7 Remote Control Protocol Compatible with the PSM-4900?

The M7 has significant new capabilities and features that cannot fit into the structure of the PSM-4900
protocol. However, the M7 will respond to properly formatted PSM-4900 binary control packets within
the capabilities of the PSM-4900. This allows mixed systems of 4900 and 500 series modems without
initially changing control software. The compatibility does not currently extend to operation over the
link on the MCC channel.
4.7.1.2. Operating and Performance Questions.
4.7.1.2.1. There are so many options and parameter settings! Where do I start?
The M7 is highly programmable. This can make the set-up daunting at first. If you are unfamiliar with
the common terms and modes used in satellite communications you should first refer to Chapter 2 of
this manual “Installation and Setup”. As a starting point the modem can also be taken to a default
basic set of operating parameters by using the front panel <Unit: Configuration - Recall> parameter

4-14 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

and select option “0” or “Factory”. From that point you make necessary changes to set the desired
configuration. Once all parameters are set as required the configuration can be saved using the
<Unit: Configuration - Store> control. From there you can always go back to this configuration by
recalling it.
4.7.1.2.2. Why doesn’t my M7 talk to another M7 over the satellite? I have set all the
parameters the same.
Any satellite modem has a significant number of parameters, which are settable in order to achieve
the maximum performance at the least cost. Because there are so many parameters it is possible to
have one unit with a slightly different parameter set than that at the other end of the link. If after
insuring that all parameters are set the same and that the acquisition range is correct and that there
are no interfering carriers; one other method is to take both modems back to the factory default
condition and rebuild the configuration from “scratch”. Use the front panel <Unit: Configuration -
Recall> and select option “0” or “Factory”. You may want to save your current configuration before
resetting to the default.
4.7.1.2.3. What is the delay from end to end using the M7?
The satellite link itself represents a fixed and very slightly variable delay due to the distance of the
satellite from the two stations linked. This delay is approximately 250 milli-seconds. In addition
Appendix A lists the specified fixed and rate dependent delays incurred in the modem’s transmit and
receive processing, including those in the IBS Multiplexer and Reed-Solomon if equipped and
enabled.
4.7.1.2.4. Can I use the M7 to help align the station antenna? Is an AGC output provided
to feed to automatic antenna positioning equipment?
Yes - The M7 has a single analog output that is produced by the main processor and converted to
analog by a D/A converter. The parameter selected for this output can be either the AGC, Eb/No or
Mod CXR Level selected in the <Unit: Monitor - Mode>. The slope and polarity are selected using
the “Zero” and “Full” parameters below this. The signal is available at the rear panel on the J5 Alarm
Connector, pin 5 with the Ground return on pin 6. See Installation Section 2.3.3, “Alarm Connection”,
and Operations Section 3.11 for more information on connection and use of the monitor function.
The AGC has been the classic parameter used for this type of function, but the M7 provides an output
that may be better in most situations. That is the Eb/No, which is a function without the slope changes
and negative signal sense of the AGC signal.
4.7.1.2.5. Where is the “Eye Pattern” test points for the I and Q channel receive signals?
The M7 does not have an analog test point to view the eye pattern. All information at this point in the
receive chain is digital and measured by the modem processor. The result of this measurement is
presented as the Eb/No. If it is absolutely essential to view the eye pattern as analog test information,
contact the factory for availability of a special test fixture for conversion.
4.7.1.2.6. What happened to the Burst Modulator mode in the M7?
The M7 has the basic circuitry necessary to implement burst modulation. The burst demodulation
scheme compatible with the modulation used in the PSM-2100 is no longer manufactured, and there
is no clear standard for implementing this capability. Modifying the M7 to work with a specific burst
demodulator scheme is an option which requires contacting the factory for availability.
4.7.1.2.7. How do I use the modulator and demodulator functions to invert the spectrum?
These options were added into the M7 to aid in building specialized systems which may invert the
spectrum sense of the received carrier. The main cause of this would be an up or down converter
which performs a spectrum inversion.
4.7.1.2.8. How do I use the modulator and demodulator functions to vary the FEC C0 and
C1 values?
These options were added into the M7 to help achieve compatibility with other brands of modems at
the other end of a link. These parameter settings also allow changing the modulation of adjacent
carriers on the satellite so that a demodulator will not lock to them. This has value if the carriers are

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-15

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

placed closer than the required receive acquisition range. Using this scheme requires the use of the
demodulator search mode.
Intelsat in the latest IESS 308/309 has changed the definition of the C0 and C1 values. This option
allows compatibility with any definition.
4.7.1.2.9. How do I determine the transmitted "Symbol Rate" of the modem?

This particular parameter used to be a lot simpler to define. With the introduction of Turbo
Product Codes coupled with all the other modem modes and options like programmable IBS
multiplexer data load it is now extremely hard to define. The modem knows though, and it is
available at the front panel parameter showing the current transmit/receive symbol rate. It is
in the <Mod: Test – Symbol Rate> and the <Dem: Test – Symbol Rate> parameters.

4.7.2. Why does It do that?

4.7.2.1. The modem is operating fine and then suddenly will not lock!
You probably have the differential encoder/decoder turned off. It is only provided as a control for very
special cases and should normally be set to “Enabled”.
4.7.2.2. The modem changed its operating parameters without me doing anything!
The ACR or Automatic Configuration Recovery feature is possibly enabled by setting one of the
<Unit: Config – Recall X> parameters set to a non-zero value. This will change the modem
configuration if the receive carrier is lost longer than the number of seconds entered.
The <Unit: Config – Power-Up> parameter may be set to change to a specified configuration on
power-up. The normal setting for this is “Last” (0).
4.7.3. Front Panel Control
4.7.3.1. What happened to the “Differential Encoder/Decoder parameter?
In normal operation there is no need to disable the Differential encoder or decoder. We only found
that occasionally someone disabled it and then had problems locking up to carriers, so this capability
was initially removed from front panel control. All of the latest firmware however now allows this
control, so you may need to update your firmware.
4.7.3.2. How do I enter a number with a minus sign?
At any time during the “Edit” process the “+/-“ key will change the sign of the current entry (if the
change is possible). In the quick edit mode this can be the first key pressed, so for instance, if the
current setting for modulator transmit output level is –10 dBm then pressing “+/-, 12” will enter a value
of –12 dBm. You could also press “1+/-2” or “12+/-” with the same result.
4.7.3.3. Why doesn’t the M7 front panel act like the PSM-2100 or PSM-4900? [and] How do I
make it act like the PSM-2100?
The M7 has many more features and programmable options than the PSM-2100 modems. A close
match is achieved by disabling the “quick” entry mode and remembering to press the “Edit” key first
instead of the “Enter” key. Once you become accustomed to the “Quick” entry mode and using the
change sign (+/-) and decimal point keys you will find it more convenient than any entry on the PSM-
2100.
4.7.3.4. Why does the transmit carrier turn off whenever I make a change?
First the transmit carrier can be set to a mode which will turn the carrier off if any change is made that
would result in a possible interference with other carriers on the satellite. This mode can be set to one
of three states: Automatic, Confirm or Manual. Automatic will turn the carrier off during the parameter
change and return the carrier on (if currently enabled) after the change is completed, Confirm will ask
if the carrier should be left on (requiring a “yes” or “no” answer), while Manual will always turn the
carrier off after a change. This option is set in <Mod: IF – Mute>. More directly the setting described
is probably set to “Manual” mute mode.

4-16 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

4.7.3.5. Why can’t I find or see a certain option parameter that is shown in the tables?
Many parameters are only available when another option has been enabled which requires that
parameter. For example, the <Demod: IF – Sweep Time> parameter is only visible if the <Demod:
IF – Sweep Mode> is set to “Search”. These options are shown in the tables as gray to indicate this
status.
4.7.3.6. Can I control the far end modem from the front panel of a local modem?
The M7 has the ability to control the far end modem (when linked and locked) from a local modem,
but only using the remote control port. This ability requires enabling the Multiplexer option. Control
from the front panel is prone to possible mistakes that would lead to accidentally setting the remote
modem in a state that could not be recovered without going to the remote site.
4.7.3.7. The far right “Remote” LED is blinking. What does it mean?
The Unit Remote Activity parameters allow setting this lamp to blink when activity is detected on the
USB or serial remote control ports. The same is possible for the “Local” LED using the Unit Keyboard
Activity control.
4.7.3.8. I seem to have no modulator or demodulator functions available?
There are two reasons that could explain this. First, there are some units sold with only one function
installed for special purposes. These units would have a model number indicating this such as PST
for a Modulator transmit only or PSD indicating a Demodulator receive only.
The other reason could be that the Modulator or Demodulator is disabled. To check and enable if
desired, go to the <Unit: Config – Modem>.parameter which shows what is enabled and allows
changing.
4.7.3.9. What do the abbreviations on the front panel and in the manual mean?
See the abbreviations in FAQ Section E below.
4.7.4. Remote Control
4.7.4.1. Where is the ASCII Control packet structure in the M7?
The M7 and the PSM-4900 modems do not have an ASCII control packet protocol, only the binary
packet protocol. The SnIP however does have a fairly complete command line driven control method
via the “M7ctl” program. In addition the SnIP can potentially control multiple modems connected via
its external RS-485 control port.
4.7.4.2. Can I use the USB connector at J10 to remotely control the M7?
The USB connector is mainly intended for firmware updates requiring a faster speed than the RS-
232/449 connection can supply. It is possible to control the modem in binary packet mode via the
USB connection. However, this connection does not use or accept addresses in the packet structure,
so it will likely require re-writing your packet routines.
You cannot currently use the USB connection for “Terminal Mode” control.
4.7.4.3. Is there a “compatibility” mode for the remote control binary packet protocol that
looks like that in the PSM-4900?
Yes. The new M7 design dictated a new structure to implement the significantly greater number of
commands available in the M7. Many items such as the interface structure, data rates and available
options are so different that creating a compatible command set was impossible. However the M7
actually contains both its own and a copy of the PSM-4900 protocol, allowing the M7 to accept and
respond to PSM-4900 packets within the limitations of the PSM-4900 capabilities. This allows mixed
systems of 4900 and 500 series modems without initially changing control software. The compatibility
does not currently extend to operation over the link on the MCC channel.
4.7.4.4. Is there a “compatibility” mode for the remote control binary packet protocol that
looks like that in the PSM-2100?
No. The new commands dictated a new structure to implement the significantly greater number of
commands available in the M7. Many items such as the interface structure, data rates and available

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-17

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

options are so different that creating a compatible command set was impossible. The packet structure
itself is virtually identical though and in most cases the new command set can be accommodated by a
“driver” tailored to the M7.
4.7.5. Data Interface
4.7.5.1. How do I make a cable to connect to my V.35 (or EIA-530) device?
See the “Installation” Chapter 2 and Appendix C on “Cabling Specifications” which shows how to
make cables to interface between the modem’s DB37 connector and other types of common
connectors used.
4.7.5.2. Where do I get a “Y” cable to implement 1:1 redundancy?
These may be purchased from Datum Systems or it is possible to build your own. The connections
are discussed in Chapter 2 “Installation” and shown in Appendix C, “Cabling Specifications”.
4.7.5.3. Why do I keep getting “sync losses” on my link? Or why does a BERT test show
“sync losses”?
This is usually a sign that some section of the link has a clock or data inversion. See Chapter 4 of the
manual for “Loop” testing to try to determine where the problem is and correct either the wiring or
change the modem data or clock sense.
4.7.5.4. Why does the modem occasionally fail to operate with my DTE equipment, and to
correct it I have to invert the data or clock?
The only cause in an otherwise functioning modem for this symptom is that the differential
encoder/decoder is turned off. Modems use the differential encoding to determine the proper
relationship between the clock and data. If the encoder is turned off the modem has a possibility of
locking to a signal with the wrong phase. For all normal operation of the modem the Modulator
differential encoder and the Demodulator differential decoder must be “Enabled”.
The Turbo Product Codes (TPC) option does not use the differential encoder, and when it is enabled
the differential encoder and/or decoder is turned off and the option is removed from the parameter
matrix. Other modes also automatically control the differential encoder and decoder in the M7, but a
linked modem may have the ability to turn it on or off.
4.7.5.5. How do I use the built-in Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) set?
See Maintenance Section 4.1.2 for information on using the built-in BERT. The M7 BERT now has
the ability to be switched to look at the data line side.
4.7.5.6. Can I use the built-in Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) set to test the line or DTE side
equipment?
Yes with reservations. The BERT is designed to normally transmit and receive to the modem side.
New in the M7 is the ability to electrically switch the direction that the BERT “looks” toward the line
side. However, because of the hard wiring of the interface the pinout is fixed as a DCE device. See
Maintenance Section 4.1.2 for information on using the built-in BERT.
4.7.5.7. Why doesn’t my 1:1 redundant switch on certain alarms?
The 1:1 redundancy logic is programmable on two levels. First is the <Unit: Redundcy – SW Rqst>
parameter which selects whether a switch is requested on all alarms, alarm A and/or alarm B. If it is
set to any options but “On All Alarms” then the particular alarms that are summed into the A and B
alarms are themselves programmable, creating the second level. See the discussion in section for
more information.

4-18 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05

M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem Maintenance

4.7.6. Manual
4.7.6.1. What do the abbreviations on the front panel and in the manual mean?
A good example is the display and manual representation "Redundcy SW Rqst". Unfortunately the
display does not hold enough characters to display the full text of "Redundancy Switch Request".
Following is a list of abbreviations used.

Abbreviation Full Text

One for One, One for N and M for N. All
1:1, 1:N, M:N
redundancy switch types.
ACR Automatic Configuration Recovery
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AGC Automatic Gain Control
ALC Automatic Level Control
Alm Alarm
Alt Alternate
AUPC Automatic Uplink Power Control
AUFC Automatic Uplink Frequency Control
BER, BERT Bit Error Rate, Bit Error Rate Test
BUC Block Up-Converter
Cal Calibrate
Clk Clock
Config Configuration
Cntst Contrast
CXR Carrier
Dem Demodulator
Dif Differential
ESC Engineering Service Channel
Erred Errored
FEC Forward Error Correction
Freq, Frq Frequency
Frmt Format
HSSI High Speed Serial Interface (used with routers)
IDcOff, QDcOff I and Q channel DC Offset
I/O Input/Output
Intf Interface
Keybrd Keyboard
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDPC & FLDPC (Flexible) Low Density Parity Check FEC
LNB Low Noise Block downconverter
LO Local Oscillator
Loopbck Loop-back

M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05 4-19

Maintenance M7/M7L/M7LT Modular Satellite Modem

Lvl Level
Max Maximum
MCC Modem Control Channel
Min Minimum
Mod Modulator
Mux Multiplexer
Opt Option
OverHd Overhead
RCV, Rcv Receive, into the Demodulator
Redundcy Redundancy
Ref Reference
Rqst Request
RS, R-S Reed-Solomon – Type of FEC
Sat Satellite
SCPC Single Channel Per Carrier
SER Symbol Error Rate
Satellite network Interface Processor, our name
SnIP
for an Ethernet Interface running Linux.
SW, Sw Switch
Sync Synchronous or Synchronization
SysClk System Clock
Ter, Terr Terrestrial – Line side of modem
TPC Turbo Product Codes – Type of FEC
Tst Test
USB Universal Serial Bus
VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal
XMT, Xmt Transmit, from the Modulator

4-20 M7/M7L/M7LT - Rev. 0.05